Hart Scientific

1560 Black Stack

Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Rev. 932001
 Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability
Each product from Fluke Corporation, Hart Scientific Division ("Hart") is warranted to be free from de-
fects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period is 2 years for the
Black Stack. The warranty period begins on the date of the shipment. Parts, product repairs, and services
are warranted for 90 days. The warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Hart
authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any other product, which in
Hart's opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of
operation or handling. Hart warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its func-
tional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Hart does
not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption. Hart does not warrant calibra-
tions on the Black Stack.

Hart authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers
only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Hart. Warranty support is
available if product is purchased through a Hart authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable
international price. Hart reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repairs/replacement
parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.

Hart's warranty obligation is limited, at Hart's option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge re-
pair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Hart authorized service center within
the warranty period.

To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Hart authorized service center or send the product, with
a description of the difficulty, postage, and insurance prepaid (FOB Destination), to the nearest Hart au-
thorized service center. Hart assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the prod-
uct will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Hart determines that the
failure was caused by misuse, alteration, accident or abnormal condition or operation or handling, Hart
will provide an estimate or repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following
repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for
the repair and return transportation charges (FOB Shipping Point).

THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IM-
PLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
HART SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL. OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, WHETHER ARISING FROM
BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, RELIANCE OR ANY OTHER
THEORY.

Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not
apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of com-
petent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.

Fluke Corporation, Hart Scientific Division

799 E. Utah Valley Drive • American Fork, UT 84003-9775 • USA
Phone: +1.801.763.1600 • Telefax: +1.801.763.1010
E-mail: support@hartscientific.com

www.hartscientific.com
Subject to change without notice. • Copyright © 2005 • Printed in USA

Rev. 932001
Table of Contents

1 Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 Symbols Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.2 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Authorized Service Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.1 Base Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.1.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.1.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1.3 Serial RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1.5 Module Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.2 Add-On Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3 Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.2 Sampling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.3 Input Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.4 Temperature Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.5 Unit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.6 Primary Measurement Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.7 Graph and Scroll Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.8 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.9 Printer Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.10 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.11 Output Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.12 Display Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3.13 Data Output Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3 Specifications and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . 19

3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 Environmental Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

4 General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.1 Installing New Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2 AC Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3 Power On Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4 Adjusting the Screen Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

iii
 4.5 Making Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.5.1 Selecting Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.5.2 Selecting the Probe Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5.3 Measuring One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.4 Scanning Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.5 Displaying Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

5 Soft-Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1 Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.1 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1.2 Primary Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1.3 Scan Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1.4 Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.1.5 Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.2 Probe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2.1 Edit Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2.1.1 R(Ω) Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.1.2 ITS-90 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.1.3 W(T ) Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.2.1.4 IPTS-68 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.2.1.5 Callendar-Van Dusen Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.2.1.6 RTD Polynomial Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.2.1.7 Thermistor T(R) Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.2.1.8 Thermistor R(T) Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.2.1.9 Thermocouple Volts Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.2.1.10 Standard Thermocouple Conversions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.2.1.11 Thermocouple Table Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.2.1.12 Thermocouple Polynomial Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2.2 Copy Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2.3 Test Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3 Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.1 Display Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.3.1.1 Statistical Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.3.1.2 Set Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.3.1.3 Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.3.1.4 Clear Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.3.1.5 Scrolling Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.3.2 Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.3.3 Print Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3.4 Print Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.5 Clear Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.4 Module Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.4.1 Set Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.4.2 Set Up Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.4.3 Calibrate Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.4.4 Module Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.5 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.5.1 Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.5.2 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5.3 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5.4 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

iv
 5.5.5 System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

6 Digital Communications Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.2 Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.3 Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.4 Command Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.5 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.5.1 Measurement Data Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.5.1.1 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.5.1.2 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.5.1.3 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.5.1.4 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n][:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.5.1.5 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:TYPE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.5.1.6 CONFigure[<channel>]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.5.1.7 CONFigure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.5.1.8 DATA[:DATA]:VALue? [MEM,]<numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.5.1.9 DATA:POINts? [MEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.5.1.10 FETCh[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.5.1.11 MEASure[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.5.1.12 READ[:TEMPerature]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.5.1.13 SENSe[n]:AVERage:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.5.2 Measurement Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.5.2.1 ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.5.2.2 INITiate[:IMMediate]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.5.2.3 INITiate:CONTinuous <Boolean>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.5.2.4 INITiate:CONTinuous? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.5.2.5 SENSe:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.5.2.6 SENSe:AVERage:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2.7 SENSe:AVERage[:STATe] <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2.8 SENSe: AVERage[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2.9 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2.10 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2.11 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.2.12 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.2.13 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.2.14 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.3 Input Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.3.1 ROUTe:CLOSe <channel>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5.3.2 ROUTe:CLOSe:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5.3.3 ROUTe:PRIMary? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5.3.4 ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.3.5 ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.3.6 ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST] <channel_list>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.3.7 ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.3.8 ROUTe:SCAN:STATe <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.5.3.9 ROUTe:SCAN:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.5.4 Probe Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.5.4.1 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:CATalog?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.5.4.2 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:COPY <channel> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.5.4.3 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.5.4.4 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME <conversion_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.5.4.5 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.5.4.6 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:CATalog? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.5.4.7 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue <parameter_name>, <nu-
meric_value>[,<parameter_name>,<numeric_value> . . . ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.5.4.8 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? <parameter_name> . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.5.4.9 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? ALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.5.4.10 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber <serial_number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

v
 6.5.4.11 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.5.4.12 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow <sub-range_number>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.5.4.13 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.5.4.14 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh <sub-range_number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.5.4.15 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.5.4.16 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:TEST? <numeric_value>[,<numeric_value>] . . . . . . . 87
6.5.5 Output Channel Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.5.5.1 OUTPut[n]:CALC <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.5.5.2 OUTPut[n]:CALC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.5.5.3 OUTPut[n]:NCHannel <channel> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.5.5.4 OUTPut[n]:NCHannel?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.5.5.5 OUTPut[n]:PCHannel <channel> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.5.5.6 OUTPut[n]:PCHannel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.5.5.7 OUTPut[n][:STATe] <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.5.5.8 OUTPut[n][:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.5.6 Printer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.5.6.1 HCOPy:ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.5.6.2 HCOPy[:IMMediate] <printer_number>,<numeric_value>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.5.6.3 HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe] <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.5.6.4 HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.7 Communication Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.7.1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.7.2 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.7.3 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUPlex <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.7.4 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.5.7.5 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed <Boolean>. . . . . . . . . . 93
6.5.7.6 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.5.8 Module Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.5.8.1 SYSTem:CONFigure:CDEVice? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.5.8.2 SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:DADDress? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.5.8.3 SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:MADDress? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.5.8.4 SYSTem:CONFigure:ICHannel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.5.8.5 SYSTem:CONFigure:IDEVice? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.5.8.6 SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:DADDress? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.5.8.7 SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:MADDress?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
6.5.8.8 SYSTem:CONFigure:MNUMber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.8.9 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:INFormation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.8.10 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DNUMber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.8.11 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:INFormation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.8.12 SYSTem:CONFigure:OCHannel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.5.8.13 SYSTem:CONFigure:ODEVice? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.5.8.14 SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:DADDress?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.5.8.15 SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:MADDress? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.5.8.16 SYSTem:CONFigure:PDEVice? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.5.8.17 SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:DADDress?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.8.18 SYSTem:CONFigure: PRINter[n]:MADDress? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.8.19 SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:READ? <device_command> . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.8.20 SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:WRITe <device_command>,<value> . . . . . . . 98
6.5.9 System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.5.9.1 *IDN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.5.9.2 *OPT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.5.9.3 *RST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.5.9.4 SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.5.9.5 SYSTem:DATE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.6 SYSTem:SNUMber <serial_number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.7 SYSTem:SNUMber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.8 SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.9 SYSTem:TIME? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.10 SYSTem:VERSion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.9.11 UNIT:TEMPerature <unit> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.5.9.12 UNIT:TEMPerature? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.5.10 Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.5.10.1 *CLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

vi
 6.5.10.2 *ESE <numeric_value>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.5.10.3 *ESE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.5.10.4 *ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.5.10.5 *OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.5.10.6 *OPC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.5.10.7 *SRE <numeric_value>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.5.10.8 *SRE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.5.10.9 *STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.5.10.10 *TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.10.11 *WAI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.10.12 STATus:OPERation:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.10.13 STATus:OPERation:ENABle <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.5.10.14 STATus:OPERation:ENABle?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.10.15 STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.10.16 STATus:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.10.17 STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5.10.18 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <numeric_value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.10.19 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.10.20 STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.10.21 STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.10.22 SYSTem:ERRor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

6.6 Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

7 2560/2567 SPRT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.3.1 Connecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.3.2 Setting Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.3.3 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.3.4 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.4.2 Front-panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.4.3 Calibration Procedure (2560) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.4.4 Calibration Procedure (2567) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

8 2561 HTPRT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.3.1 Connecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.3.2 Setting Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.3.3 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.3.4 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.4.2 Front-panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.4.3 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

vii
 9.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9.3.1 Wire Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.3.2 Connecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.3.3 Setting Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.3.4 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.3.5 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.4.2 Front-Panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.4.3 Calibration Procedure (2562) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.4.4 Calibration Procedure (2568) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

10 2563 Thermistor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
10.3.1 Connecting a Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
10.3.2 Setting Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.3.3 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.3.4 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.4.2 Front-panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.4.3 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.3.1 Wire Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.3.2 Connecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.3.3 Setting Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11.3.4 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.3.5 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.4.2 Front-Panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.4.3 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

12.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
12.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

viii
 12.2.1 Calculating Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12.3.1 Connecting a Thermocouple. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12.3.2 Selecting the Thermocouple Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12.3.3 Selecting the CJC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12.3.4 Using Calibrated Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.5 Suggestions for Optimum Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.5.1 Warm-up Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.5.2 Ambient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.5.3 Thermal Settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.5.4 Ground Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3.6 Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.4.2 Front-Panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.4.3 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.2.1 Calculating Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
13.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
13.3.1 Connecting a Thermocouple. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
13.3.2 Selecting the Thermocouple Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
13.3.3 Selecting the CJC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.3.4 Using Calibrated Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.3.5 Suggestions for Optimum Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.3.5.1 Warm-up Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.3.5.2 Ambient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.3.5.3 Thermal Settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.3.6 Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.4.1 Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.4.2 Front-Panel Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.4.3 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

14 3560 Extended Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 163

14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.4 GPIB Communication Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.4.1 Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.4.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.4.3 Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
14.4.4 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
14.4.5 Serial Poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
14.4.6 Device Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

ix
 14.4.7 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
14.5 Serial Communication Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.5.1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.5.2 Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
14.5.3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.5.4 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.6 Serial Printer Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
14.6.1 Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
14.6.2 Printing Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
14.6.3 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
14.7 Parallel Printer Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.7.1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.7.2 Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.7.3 Printing Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
14.7.4 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
14.8 Analog Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14.8.1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14.8.2 Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14.8.3 Selecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.8.4 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.8.5 Device Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

16 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
16.1 Incorrect Temperature Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
16.2 Incorrect Resistance or Voltage Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
16.3 Communication Difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
16.4 Blank Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
16.5 Error Message at Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
16.6 CE Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
16.6.1 EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
16.6.1.1 Immunity Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
16.6.1.2 Emission Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
16.6.2 Low Voltage Directive (Safety) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

x
Figures

Figure 1 1560 Black Stack Thermometer with Two Modules Attached . . . . . . 5

Figure 2 System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3 Typical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 4 Typical graph mode display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 5 Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 6 Attaching new modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 7 Channel numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 8 Typical Statistical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 9 Typical Graph Window Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 10 Typical Scrolling Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 11 RS-232 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 12 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 13 Sensor Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 14 Sensor Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 15 PRT Scanner Module Sensor Wiring Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 16 Sensor Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 17 Thermistor Scanner Module Sensor Wiring Detail . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 18 2565 Module Thermocouple Receptacle Operation . . . . . . . . . . 150

xi
 Tables

Table1 International Electrical Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Table 2 Soft-key Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 3 Conversion Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 4 CALCULATION option.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 5 Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 6 Command Summary continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 7 Command Summary continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 8 Command Summary continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 9 Measurement Data Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 10 Statistical Calculation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 11 Measurement Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 12 Input Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 13 Probe Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 14 Conversion Type Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 15 Conversion Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 16 Output Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table 17 Output Calculation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Table 18 Printer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 19 Communication Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 20 Module Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 21 System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 22 Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 23 SPRT Module Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 24 HTPRT Module Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 25 PRT Scanner Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 26 Thermistor Module Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 27 Thermistor Scanner Module Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 28 Precision Thermocouple Module calibration parameters . . . . . . . . 152
Table 29 Themocouple Scanner Module calibration parameters . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 30 3560 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 31 GPIB Communicatinos Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 32 Serial Communication Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 33 Serial Printer Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Table 34 Parallel Printer Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Table 35 Analog Output Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

xii
 1 Before You Start
Symbols Used

1 Before You Start

1.1 Symbols Used

Table 1 lists the International Electrical Symbols. Some or all of these symbols
may be used on the instrument or in this manual.

Table1 International Electrical Symbols

Symbol Description

AC

AC-DC

Battery

CE

DC

Double Insulated

Electric Shock

Fuse

PE Ground

Hot Surface

Read the User’s Manual

Off

1
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

On

Canadian Standards Association

OVERVOLTAGE (Installation) CATEGORY II, Pollution Degree 2 per IEC1010-1 re-

fers to the level of Impulse Withstand Voltage protection provided. Equipment of
OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II is energy-consuming equipment to be supplied from
the fixed installation. Examples include household, office, and laboratory appliances.
C-TIC Australian EMC

The European Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive

(2002/96/EC) mark.

1.2 Safety Information

Use this instrument only as specified in this manual. Otherwise, the protection
provided by the instrument may be impaired. Refer to the safety information in
Warnings and Cautions.
The following definitions apply to the terms “Warning” and “Caution”.
• “Warning” identifies conditions and actions that may pose hazards to the
user.
• “Caution” identifies conditions and actions that may damage the instru-
ment being used.

1.2.1 Warnings
DO NOT use this unit in environments other than those listed in the User’s
Guide.
Follow all safety guidelines listed in the User’s Guide.
Calibration equipment should only be used by trained personnel.
This instrument can measure extreme temperatures. Precautions must be taken
to prevent personal injury or damage to objects. Probes may be extremely hot
or cold. Cautiously handle probes to prevent personal injury. Carefully place
probes on a heat/cold resistant surface or rack until they reach room
temperature.
DO NOT use this instrument in combination with any probe ( PRT, thermistor,
or thermocouple) to measure the temperature or resistance of any device where
the probe might come in contact with a conductor that is electrically energized.
Severe electric shock, personal injury, or death may occur.

2
 1 Before You Start
Authorized Service Centers

1.2.2 Cautions
The instrument and thermometer probes are sensitive and can be easily dam-
aged. Always handle these devices with care. DO NOT allow them to be
dropped, struck, stressed, or overheated.
Probes are fragile devices which can be damaged by mechanical shock, over-
heating, and absorption of moisture or fluids in the wires or hub. Damage may
not be visibly apparent but nevertheless can cause drift, instability, and loss of
accuracy. Observe the following precautions:
DO NOT allow probes to be dropped, struck, bent, or stressed.
DO NOT overheat probes beyond their recommended temperature range.
DO NOT allow any part of the probe other than the sheath to be immersed in
fluid.
DO NOT allow the probe hub or wires to be exposed to excessive
temperatures.
Keep the probe wires clean and away from fluids.

1.3 Authorized Service Centers

Please contact one of the following authorized Service Centers to coordinate
service on your Hart product:

Fluke Corporation, Hart Scientific Division

799 E. Utah Valley Drive
American Fork, UT 84003-9775
USA

Phone: +1.801.763.1600
Telefax: +1.801.763.1010
E-mail: support@hartscientific.com

Fluke Nederland B.V.

Customer Support Services
Science Park Eindhoven 5108
5692 EC Son
NETHERLANDS

Phone: +31-402-675300
Telefax: +31-402-675321
E-mail: ServiceDesk@fluke.nl

3
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Fluke Int'l Corporation

Service Center - Instrimpex
Room 2301 Sciteck Tower
22 Jianguomenwai Dajie
Chao Yang District
Beijing 100004, PRC
CHINA

Phone: +86-10-6-512-3436
Telefax: +86-10-6-512-3437
E-mail: xingye.han@fluke.com.cn

Fluke South East Asia Pte Ltd.

Fluke ASEAN Regional Office
Service Center
60 Alexandra Terrace #03-16
The Comtech (Lobby D)
118502
SINGAPORE

Phone: +65 6799-5588

Telefax: +65 6799-5588
E-mail: antng@singa.fluke.com
When contacting these Service Centers for support, please have the following
information available:
• Model Number
• Serial Number
• Voltage
• Complete description of the problem

4
 2 Introduction
Features

2 Introduction
This first section describes the 1560 Black Stack in general. Unique features of
the 1560 are explained in the first sub-section. Following sub-sections describe
the components of the 1560 and the measurement process in greater detail.

2.1 Features
The 1560 Black Stack has a unique modular design that consists of a base con-
troller and add-on modules. The base controller is the “brain” of the system. It
directs all operations and provides control signals and power for the modules.
The modules are the appendages that give the system the ability to measure
temperature and communicate with other instruments. Different modules can

Figure 1 1560 Black Stack Thermometer with Two Modules Attached

5
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

have different functions. One module may measure platinum resistance ther-
mometers (PRTs) while another may measure thermocouples. Still another
module may provide an interface to a printer. Modules may have more than one
independent function or device. For example, a single module may include a
GPIB communications device and a Centronics printer interface device. A sin-
gle device, such as a thermocouple scanner, may also contain multiple chan-
nels. By adding certain modules together, an instrument can be assembled with
extraordinary capabilities.
Every add-on module conforms to specific physical and electrical requirements.
This allows any module to be easily connected to the system. Up to eight mod-
ules can be stacked onto the base. Modules can be purchased at any time and
installed quickly and easily in the field allowing the system to grow as needs
arise. The base controller automatically recognizes attached modules. New
channels and functions immediately become available.
Each add-on module is an independent intelligent instrument. Modules contain
their own microcontroller, memory, and analog-to-digital converter, if neces-
sary. Communication between modules and the base uses a proprietary
high-speed digital bus. Modules are calibrated individually with calibration pa-
rameters stored in non-volatile memory within the module.
The physical layout of the 1560 Black Stack is optimized for user convenience.
The front panel is tilted for clear viewing of the display and easy access to the
buttons. Measurements are displayed with large easy-to-read numbers. Bright-
ness and contrast of the screen are adjustable. The graphics LCD display is able
to show a large amount of information and can be configured for different uses.
In its statistical window mode, the display can simultaneously show measure-
ments from different channels. It can also show the results of statistical analysis
of these measurements. In graph mode, the display shows a plot of measure-
ments over time. Operation of the 1560 is made simple and intuitive with the
use of soft-keys. The functions of the five soft-keys are indicated on the graph-
ics display and change depending on the selected menu.
The primary purpose of the 1560 Black Stack is to measure temperature.
Typically, it will be fitted with modules that allow it to measure with certain
types of sensors such as PRTs or thermocouples. Since many modules can be
attached, each having many channels, the system may have a large number and
variety of input channels. The base controller is capable of recognizing up to 96
input channels. The base can be programmed to measure one channel continu-
ously or scan many channels automatically. It can also be programmed to ac-
quire a certain number of measurements then stop. Measurements can be stored
in memory and printed later.
The 1560 Black Stack is designed to measure a variety of sensors: platinum re-
sistance thermometers (PRTs) or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs), stan-
dard platinum resistance thermometers (SPRTs), thermistors, thermocouples,
and others. The base controller is able to mathematically convert measurements
of resistance or volts to temperature using any of the standard algorithms. With
PRTs, RTDs, and SPRTs, temperature can be calculated according to ITS-90,
IPTS-68, Callendar-Van Dusen, or a polynomial. Probe-specific characteriza-

6
 2 Introduction
Components

tion coefficients are accepted for calibrated sensors. With thermistors, tempera-
ture can be calculated according to the Steinhart-Hart equation or a polynomial
with user-specified coefficients. With thermocouples, temperature is calculated
according to the standard tables for type B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, and gold-plati-
num thermocouples as well as a polynomial or user-specified table. Adjust-
ments to the standard curve can be made for improved accuracy.
Thermocouples can be used with internal or external cold-junction compensa-
tion. Characterizations are independently chosen for each sensor channel. Tem-
perature can be displayed in units of degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, or
Kelvin.
The temperature conversion algorithms and characterization coefficients can be
easily tested. You can enter arbitrary resistances or voltages and the corre-
sponding temperature is immediately displayed.
In addition to simple temperature measurements, the 1560 will calculate and
display statistical results that include: average, standard deviation, maximum,
minimum, and spread. It will also display differences between measurements of
any two channels. The 1560 can send measurement results to printer ports,
communication ports, and output channels provided by modules.
The 1560 has a built-in clock. This not only allows the display to show the cur-
rent time-of-day but allows each measurement to be stamped with the time.
Measurements are printed with the time and date.
The 1560 is designed for operation not only with the front panel buttons but
also using any of a variety of digital communication interfaces. The base con-
troller includes one built-in serial RS-232 port. IEEE-488 (GPIB) is available
with an add-on module. Communication interfaces allow the 1560 to accept
commands to perform a variety of useful functions. Using the serial or GPIB
interface, a remote instrument or computer can control the acquisition of mea-
surements and read back measurement data.

2.2 Components
Figure 2 shows the system layout of the 1560 Black Stack. The components are
described in the following sections.

2.2.1 Base Microprocessor

The base microprocessor is the main controller of the system. It controls the
display, buttons, serial interface, and flow of data through the module bus. It
also performs temperature and statistical calculations. The microprocessor op-
erates from firmware contained in read-only memory (ROM). It uses ran-
dom-access memory (RAM) to store measurements and other data temporarily.
Data that must be preserved, even when the power is off, are stored in non-vol-
atile RAM.

2.2.1.1 Display
The front-panel LCD graphics display allows the user to view measured data as

7
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Figure 2 System Diagram

8
 2 Introduction
Components

well as a variety of other important information. It also helps the user select
functions using the soft-keys. Figure 3 shows an example of how the display
might look. The various parts of the display are described following.

Figure 3 Typical Display

Primary display window

The primary display window presents the most recent measurement. It is lo-
cated at the top-center of the screen as shown in Figure 3. It displays numbers
with up to ten digits. The unit of measurement is shown to the right of the mea-
surement value. With some measurements a multiplier such as μ, m, k, or M
may appear in front of the unit character. The area to the right of the primary
display window indicates the input channel of the displayed measurement. The
channel is identified by device name and channel number.

Measurement status
The area immediately below the primary display window shows the status of
the current measurement. The measurement mode is shown after “MEA-
SURE:”. This will be “OFF” if measuring is disabled, “ON” if measuring is
continuous, or the measurement count if the measurement mode is COUNT
(see Section 5.1.1). The input channel number of the measurement in process is
indicated on the right after “INPUT:”.

Time
The time is displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen as shown in Fig-
ure 3. The time is displayed in 12-hour format (1–12 hours) with hours, min-
utes, and “AM” or “PM”. The time is maintained even when power is off. You
are able to set the time and date (see Section 5.5.2).

9
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Soft-keys
Five soft-key labels are located along the left edge of the display next to the
soft-key buttons. The soft-key labels and the functions of the soft-key buttons
change depending on the selected menu.

Statistical display window

The large area in the center of the display has various uses. Figure 3 shows how
the center window appears in statistical mode. With this mode, the window
contains eight data fields that show the values of various measurements (see
Section 5.3.1.1 and 5.3.1.2). Each data field displays a measurement with the
value first, then the units, then the channel (or pair of channels for differential
calculations), and finally a label showing the type of calculation.

Figure 4 Typical graph mode display

Graph mode display window

Figure 4 shows how the center window appears in graph mode. With this mode,
the window shows a graph of the most recent measurements versus time (see
Section 5.3.1.3). The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis are shown at
the top and bottom on the left side of the window. The vertical scale adjusts au-
tomatically to best fit the data. The horizontal time scale is shown at the bottom
on the right. The time scale is determined by the measurement DELAY setting
(see Section 5.1.1).

Scroll mode display window

In scroll mode, the center window of the display acts as a terminal screen dis-
playing the most recent measurements. Each time a new measurement is pro-

10
 2 Introduction
Components

duced and displayed on the screen in the primary display window it is also
displayed on the top of the text output window (see Section 5.3.1.5). Each line
containing previous measurements is scrolled down one line. Measurements are
displayed with the input channel number first, then the measurement value, the
units, and the time the measurement was acquired. The time is displayed in
24-hour format (0–23 hours) with hours, minutes, and seconds.

Function window
When using the soft-key functions, the center window may temporarily be used
to show specific information. In conjunction with the numeric and arrow but-
tons, it can be used to set parameters.

2.2.1.2 Buttons
The buttons are used to select functions and edit parameters. The functions of
the various buttons are described below.

Soft-keys
The five soft-keys to the left of the display are used to select menus or menu
functions. The functions of the soft-keys are indicated by the soft-key labels on
the display next to the soft-keys. The functions of the soft-keys depend on the
selected menu. Soft-key functions are explained in detail in Section 5.

Numeric keys
The ten digit keys, the decimal point (.), minus (–), and exponent (EXP) keys
are used to type in numeric data or make numbered selections.

ENTER

The ENTER key, E , is used to enter a new parameter value or option. Gen-
erally, when the value of any parameter is changed, ENTER must be pressed to
accept the new value. If EXIT, U, or D, is pressed before ENTER, any data
entered will be ignored and the parameter will remain at its previous value.
Within a window with a list of parameters, pressing ENTER will also move the
cursor down to the next parameter. If the cursor is at the bottom of the list,
pressing ENTER without changing the parameter will exit the window. The
ENTER button may be used during some operations to affirm or continue with
an action or choice.

DEL
When entering or editing a numeric parameter, the DEL (delete) key is used to
delete a digit that is highlighted by the cursor.

EXIT
The EXIT key is used to cancel an operation, exit a window, or return from a

11
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

lower menu to a higher menu. In any window, pressing EXIT will immediately
exit the window and skip to the next window or return to the menu. If a param-
eter is entered or changed and EXIT is pressed before ENTER, the change will
be ignored. During some operations the EXIT button may be used to cancel or
discontinue with an action or choice. Use EXIT when in a lower soft-key menu
to return to the main menu.

U D
The up U and down D arrow keys are used to move the cursor through a list
of parameters in a window. Note that new data will not be accepted unless
ENTER is pressed first. Thus these keys can also be used to intentionally can-
cel a change to a parameter. If the list of parameters is too long to be displayed
in the window, U and D can be used to scroll the list. The user can hold either
of these down to scroll quickly.

L R
The left L and right R arrow keys have two functions. When entering or ed-
iting a numeric parameter these can be used to move from digit to digit. When
setting some parameters these are used to change the option.

These are the display contrast adjustment buttons. They can be used at any time
to adjust the contrast of the display.

2.2.1.3 Serial RS-232 Interface

The base includes an RS-232 serial interface. The connector is located on the bot-
tom at the rear of the front section of the base. This can be used to connect the 1560
to a printer for a hard copy printout of measurement data or to a computer for re-
mote control.

2.2.1.4 Power Supply

The power supply provides the DC power required for the electronic circuits. It
receives power from the AC mains supply. The AC power socket is located at
the bottom at the rear of the second section of the base. The power supply input
accepts 100 to 250V, 50 to 60 Hz. nominal AC power.

2.2.1.5 Module Bus

The base microprocessor communicates with all add-on modules and devices
through the module bus. The bus is of a proprietary design that is simple, reli-
able, and fast. It transfers data very quickly in an 8-bit parallel format. The
module bus also supplies power to the modules.

12
 2 Introduction
Components

2.2.2 Add-On Modules

Add-on modules provide specific functionality required by the user. Up to eight
modules can be attached to the base. A single module may contain multiple in-
dependent devices, each having a different function. For instance, the extended
communication module contains a GPIB device for parallel communications, a
Centronics interface device for printing to a printer, and an analog output de-
vice for output of measurement data as an analog voltage. There are four basic
classes or types of devices based on primary function:

Input device
An input device is used by the base controller for measuring sensors and sig-
nals. An input device may have multiple input channels. The input class in-
cludes such devices as the SPRT and thermocouple modules.

Output device
An output device is able to receive measurement data from the base controller
and transmit the data to other instruments. A data output device may have mul-
tiple output channels. The output class includes such devices as the analog
output.

Printer interface device

A printer interface device is able to receive text data from the base controller
and send it to an external printer, terminal, or data storage device. The printer
interface class includes the Centronics printer interface and the printer output
function of the built-in RS-232 interface.

Communication device
A communication device provides bi-directional communications between an
external instrument or computer and the 1560 system. This can be used to set
parameters, read measurement data, and control the operation of the 1560. The
communications class includes the IEEE-488 GPIB interface device and the
bi-directional communication function of the built-in RS-232 serial interface
device.
Each add-on module contains its own microprocessor that allows it to operate
independently with little supervision from the base controller. It also contains
its own circuitry required for its specific application. This may include circuitry
for resistance or voltage sensing, digital conversion, temperature sensing, chan-
nel switching, and digital communications. All circuits are directly controlled
by the module’s microprocessor. The module microprocessor handles any criti-
cal timing, over sampling, and error compensation calculations required to
make accurate measurements. Modules that require calibration to maintain ac-
curacy store their own calibration coefficients in non-volatile random-access
memory (NVRAM). Thus, the module remains calibrated even if it is moved
from one 1560 system to another. The module calibration parameters can be ac-
cessed through the front panel of the base.

13
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Each module recognizes and responds to a standard set of commands from the
base via the module bus. Standard commands are used for module and device
identification, status reporting, configuration, data input, and data output.

2.3 Data Processing

This section explains how measurement data is sampled, processed, and output
within the 1560 Black Stack system. Data flow is diagramed in Figure 5 with
the details explained below.

2.3.1 Inputs
Measurement data originates with input devices such as the SPRT module.
Each input device provides one or more input channels. Each device is regis-
tered by the base controller on power up and the number of channels, measure-
ment type, and applicable temperature conversion types are recorded. Input
channels are assigned numbers in the order they are recognized (see Section
4.5.1). Data received from each input channel consists of a raw measurement
value (in ohms or volts) as well as a cold-junction compensation (CJC) temper-
ature for thermocouple inputs.

2.3.2 Sampling Control

The sampling control block determines which input channels are read and
when. The time is recorded with each measurement. The sampling interval
(measurement delay) between measurements is user-programmable (see Sec-
tion 5.1.1). As the sampling control block waits to receive data from an input
channel, it displays the measurement status and channel number of the pending
measurement on the status line of the display (see Section 2.2.1.1). After sam-
pling, each measurement is immediately passed to the input average block.

2.3.3 Input Average

The input average block calculates a moving average that includes the new
measurement and a number of past measurements. Each input channel is aver-
aged independently. The average count is user-programmable (see Section
5.1.5). After averaging, the measurement is immediately passed to the tempera-
ture conversion block. It is also stored internally (with the time stamp) for pos-
sible routing to display data fields or data output channels.

2.3.4 Temperature Conversion

The temperature conversion block calculates temperature or some other derived
quantity from the averaged measurement. The conversion may be performed
using any one of a number of algorithms as appropriate for the type of input.
These may include ITS-90, W(T90), IPTS-68, Callendar-Van Dusen, thermistor
[T(R) or R(T)], polynomial, and thermocouple conversion of any standard type
with internal or external cold-junction compensation. The conversion type and
any associated coefficients that constitute a probe characterization are inde-

14
 2 Introduction
Data Processing

Figure 5 Data Flow

15
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

pendently specified for each input channel (see Section 5.2.1). Some conver-
sions, namely those for thermocouples, may use the CJC temperature read from
the module with the measurement. Converted measurements are immediately
passed to the unit conversion block.

2.3.5 Unit Conversion

The unit conversion block converts measurements to the appropriate units (see
Section 5.5.1). The temperature conversion block produces temperature values
in degrees Celsius (C). If the system units are degrees Fahrenheit (F) or Kelvin
(K), the temperature value is converted accordingly.

2.3.6 Primary Measurement Display

Each new measurement is immediately displayed on the front panel screen in
the primary measurement window. The channel number appears on the right.

2.3.7 Graph and Scroll Windows

Each new measurement also appears in the graph or scroll window, if visible.

2.3.8 Memory
Each new measurement is stored in memory. Up to 1000 measurements can be
stored. (The storage capacity may be reduced if a large number of input chan-
nels are added.) If the memory is full, the earliest measurement in memory is
discarded when a new measurement is stored. The channel number, time, and
units are stored with the measurement value. Measurements stored in memory
can be printed (see Section 5.3.4).

2.3.9 Printer Outputs

Each new measurement will be printed to any enabled printer device (see Sec-
tion 5.3.3). The channel number, units, time, and date are also printed.

2.3.10 Statistics
Each measurement is processed by the statistics block. The statistics block pro-
duces the following: the measurement value (no calculation), average, standard de-
viation, maximum, minimum, and spread. Each input channel is processed
independently. The most recent statistical results for each input channel are stored
internally for later transfer to outputs. The statistical registers can be reset by the
user (see Section 5.3.5).

2.3.11 Output Routing

The output routing block feeds measurements to the appropriate output chan-
nels. Any output channel can receive measurements from any input channel as
well as the results of statistical calculations (see Section 5.3.2). When a new
measurement is available, the output routing block passes it to all display fields
and output channels programmed to receive it.

16
 2 Introduction
Data Processing

2.3.12 Display Data Fields

In statistical mode, the center display window contains eight programmable
data fields. These can display measurements from any input channel as well as
the results of statistical calculations (see Section 5.3.1.1 and 5.3.1.2). Measure-
ments are displayed with the channel number, units, time, and a label identify-
ing the type of calculation.

2.3.13 Data Output Channels

Output devices can receive measurements from any input channel as well as the
results of statistical calculations (see Section 5.3.2). Each output device pro-
vides one or more output channels. Each device is registered by the base con-
troller on power up and the number of channels are recorded. Output channels
are assigned numbers in the order they are recognized.

17
 3 Specifications and Environmental Conditions
Specifications

3 Specifications and Environmental

Conditions

3.1 Specifications
Power 100 to 230VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, .5A
Weight (base only) 4.5 lbs.
Maximum number of modules 8
Maximum number of input channels 96

* Specifications for modules can be found in the chapters for the individual
modules.

3.2 Environmental Conditions

Although the instrument has been designed for optimum durability and trou-
ble-free operation, it must be handled with care. The instrument should not be
operated in an excessively dusty or dirty environment. Maintenance and clean-
ing recommendations can be found in the Maintenance Section of this manual.
The instrument operates safely under the following conditions:
• temperature range: Absolute 5–35°C (40–95°F) Recommended 18–28°C
(64–82°F)
• ambient relative humidity: 15–65% (70% below 30°C)
• pressure: 75kPa–106kPa
• mains voltage within ±10% of nominal
• vibrations in the calibration environment should be minimized
• altitude less than 2,000 meters

19
 4 General Operation
Installing New Modules

4 General Operation
This section explains basic operation of the 1560 Black Stack. Operation of the
1560 is explained in greater detail in subsequent sections: Section 5 explains
each of the functions available with the soft-keys and Section 6 explains the
communication commands used to operate the 1560 remotely.

4.1 Installing New Modules

The 1560 is generally supplied with certain modules already attached. How-
ever, new modules can be purchased later and attached to the back of the exist-
ing system to add extra channels or new capabilities. Modules are individually
calibrated at the factory before shipping and are ready to install and operate
without configuring or programming coefficients. They need only be attached
to the 1560. Note: Appropriate probe coefficients need to be entered.

NOTE: Before proceeding to install a new module you must recognize

that adding new modules that contain input channels will alter the existing
arrangement of input channels. All probe characterizations stored in mem-
ory will be invalidated. After installing the new module you will have to
select the conversion algorithm and enter the characterization coefficients
again for each input channel you want to use. Be prepared by having the
coefficients on hand for each probe.

Figure 6 Attaching new modules

21
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

The procedure for attaching a new module is as follows:

1. Turn off power to the 1560. Disconnect the power cord of the 1560 from
the mains supply and disconnect the power cord from the back of the
1560.
2. Tilt the 1560 on its side to access the back of the last module. If screws
are present in the two top holes, remove them. These holes will be
needed to attach the new module to the back with screws. Remove the
bus connector cover.
3. Place the new module onto the back of the last module. Make sure the
bus connectors mate properly and the alignment posts insert into the
shallow holes. The modules should be pressed together so they are tight
against each other.
4. Insert two long (3½") screws into the two lower holes of the new module
to fasten the new module to the one in front of it. Place the bus connector
cover on the last module.
If properly attached, the new module will be automatically recognized by the
1560 when it is powered up. Observe the results of the self-test shown on the
display just after the power is turned on to verify that the module is recognized
and tested without any problems (see Section 4.3). The correct number of mod-
ules should be shown. If the module is not recognized or fails the self-test, turn
the power off, disconnect the module and reattach it making sure the bus con-
nections are solid.
The 1560 is now ready for operation with the extra channels and features the
new module provides. If the new module has measurement capability, new
channels will appear in the input channel list when selecting input channels
(see Section 5.1.2 and 5.1.3). If the new module provides data output func-
tions, new output channels will appear in the channel list when programming
output channels (see Section 5.3.2). If the new module provides a printer inter-
face, the new printer device will appear in printer device lists when selecting
printing options (see Section 5.3.3 and 5.3.4). If the new module provides com-
munication ports these can immediately be used to communicate with and con-
trol the 1560 remotely. Devices contained by the new module appear in the list
for setting device parameters (Section 5.4.2) and the new module will appear in
the module list in the system information window (Section 5.5.4).

NOTE: Before making any measurements after installing a new module,

be sure to properly select the temperature conversion type and enter probe
characterization coefficients for each input channel you are using. Failure
to do so may result in inaccurate temperature measurements!

22
 4 General Operation
AC Power Source

4.2 AC Power Source

The 1560 requires an AC power source. See Section 3.1, Specifications, for
deatils. The power supply automatically adjusts to the mains voltage. The 1560
may draw up to 0.5A.
The AC power cord attaches to the 1560 at the power socket located at the rear
of the second section of the base. The power switch is also located at the rear of
the second section.

4.3 Power On Self-Test

When power is turned on, the 1560 will perform a self-test checking all the
components in the system including the module bus and each module. It will
report the status of each component on the screen. If an error occurs with the
bus or modules it may be the result of an improper connection. Turn the power
off, check the connections between the modules, and remove and reattach mod-
ules if necessary. If modules have been removed or rearranged, a warning mes-
sage may appear noting that the module configuration has changed and that all
probe parameters should be checked.

4.4 Adjusting the Screen Contrast

When the 1560 is first powered on, the screen may appear faded, dark or blank
if the contrast is not properly adjusted. Use the <C> buttons located at the
bottom of the left side of the front panel to adjust the contrast. As the 1560
warms up, the contrast may need to be adjusted.

4.5 Making Measurements

The procedure for configuring the 1560 to make measurements on a particular
input channel involves a few simple steps: select the input channel, set the con-
version type and probe characterization coefficients, and enable measuring.
These steps are explained below.

4.5.1 Selecting Input Channels

Input channels are selected by number using the PRIM CHAN soft-key in the
INPUT menu (see Section 5.1.2). The channel is selected from a window
showing a list of all available input channels. Each channel in the list is identi-
fied with the device name, the channel number, and probe serial number. The
channel is selected by using the UD buttons to move the cursor to the desired
channel and pressing ENTER.

23
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SELECT THE PRIMARY CHANNEL

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

Display will return to soft-key menu when ENTER is pressed..

Note: CHANNEL NUMBERS
Channel numbers are assigned to input channels according to their physical lo-

CH. 11 CH. 12
CH. 10 CH. 13
CH. 9 CH. 14

CH. 5 CH. 6
CH. 4 CH. 7
CH. 3 CH. 8
Thermocouple Module

CH. 1 CH. 2
SPRT Module

INPUT
—123.4507 C SPRT
01
8
9
4
PROBE MEASURE:ON INPUT:01
5
113.0
6
OUTPUT 1
2
MODULE 3
0
EXIT DEL
.
SYSTEM
130.0 6.0 min –
11:37 AM
ENT
ER

EXP

The 1560
BLACK STACK A Fluke Company

Figure 7 Channel numbering

24
 4 General Operation
Making Measurements

cations. They are not marked on modules since the locations may change de-
pending on how modules are attached. Channel numbers are assigned in
sequence, starting with 1, from left to right, front to back. The left-most chan-
nel on the first module is channel 1, the next channel on the right is channel 2,
etc. The sequence continues with the next module in the same fashion (see Fig-
ure 7). Output channel numbers are assigned using the same scheme.

4.5.2 Selecting the Probe Characterization

Before the 1560 can accurately measure temperature, it must know how to cal-
culate temperature from the resistance or voltage of the sensor. There are many
temperature conversion algorithms available and the one to use depends on the
type of sensor and its calibration. Many conversion algorithms use coefficients
that characterize the sensor. Coefficients are determined when the sensor is cal-
ibrated. SPRTs and RTDs often use the ITS-90 algorithms and are provided
with ITS-90 characterization coefficients. Thermistors often use the
Steinhart-Hart algorithms and coefficients. Thermocouples use standard tables
or equations depending on its type.
The conversion type and characterization coefficients for a sensor are specified
using the EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1).
First you must select the channel to which the sensor is connected. A window
appears showing a list of all available channels. Each channel in the list is iden-
tified with the device name, the channel number, and the serial number. The
channel is selected using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT A CHANNEL TO EDIT

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

Next, you select the conversion type and enter characterization coefficients, if
necessary. You can move to any parameter in the window with the UD but-
tons. After changing the value for any parameter you must press ENTER for
the new value to be accepted.

25
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 566-011
CONVERSION: ITS-90
LO RANGE: 4
HI RANGE: 7
R[273]: 25.546738
A[4]: -1.5763669E-4 $

Press EXIT twice to return to the soft-key menu. The coefficients you entered
can be verified by using the TEST CONV soft-key function (see Section 5.2.3)
to compare calculated temperatures to expected values from a calibration
report.

4.5.3 Measuring One Channel

The 1560 can be set up to measure one channel continuously. To do this the
scan mode must be set to primary channel and the measure mode must be on.
The scan mode is set using the SCAN MODE soft-key function in the INPUT
menu (see Section 5.1.4). Use the LR buttons to set SCAN MODE to
PRIM CHAN and press ENTER. Press EXIT to return to the menu. The mea-
sure mode is set using the MEAS soft-key function in the INPUT menu (see
Section 5.1.1). Use the LR buttons to set MEASURE to ON and press
ENTER. Press EXIT to return to the menu. See Section 4.5.1, Selecting Input
Channels, for information on how to set the primary channel.

4.5.4 Scanning Channels

The 1560 can be set up to measure several channels in sequence. To do this the
scan mode must be set to scan and the measure mode must be on. The scan
mode is set using the SCAN MODE soft-key function in the INPUT menu
(see Section 5.1.4). Use the buttons to set SCAN MODE to SCAN CHAN and
press ENTER. Press EXIT to return to the menu. The measure mode is set us-
ing the MEAS soft-key function in the INPUT menu (see Section 5.1.1). Use
the buttons to set MEASURE to ON and press ENTER. Press EXIT to return
to the menu. The 1560 will scan only channels that are enabled. Channels can
be enabled or disabled using the SCAN CHAN soft-key function in the IN-
PUT menu (see Section 5.1.3).

4.5.5 Displaying Measurement Data

Each measurement appears in the primary measurement window at the top of
the screen and is labeled with the input channel number. The area in the center
of the screen below the primary measurement window can be used to show
measurement data in a variety of formats. To graph measurements, select the
OUTPUT menu, the DISP WINDOW sub-menu, and the GRAPH WINDOW

26
 4 General Operation
Making Measurements

function (see Section 5.3.3). To show multiple lines of selected data, select the
STAT WINDOW function in the DISP WINDOW sub-menu (see Section
5.3.1). The type of data is selected using the SET FIELDS function (Section
5.3.2). To show a list of most recent measurements, select the SCROLL WIN-
DOW function in the DISP WINDOW sub-menu (Section 5.3.5).

27
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Input Menu

5 Soft-Key Functions
The soft-key menu system provides a convenient method of accessing a large
number of functions from the front panel with only a few buttons. The
soft-keys next to the display are used to select particular functions. Labels on
the display next to the soft-key identify the functions. Since there are many
more functions than soft-keys, a nested menu structure is used. Related func-
tions appear together in a soft-key menu. The soft-key menu system is outlined
in Table 2. Each soft-key function is described in detail in the following sec-
tions, organized by menu. The EXIT key is used to return from a lower menu
to the main menu.

5.1 Input Menu

The INPUT menu provides functions for controlling the measurement process,
selecting input channels, and setting measurement averaging. The soft-key
functions that appear in this menu are MEAS, PRIM CHAN, SCAN CHAN,
SCAN MODE, and AVER.

5.1.1 Measure
The MEAS soft-key allows you to control the measurement action. A window
shows the current settings of the measurement parameters and allows them to
be changed.

SET MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS

MEASURE: ON LR

COUNT N: 1
DELAY: 0
SEQ TIMER: 0

The MEASURE parameter enables or disables measuring. Options are selected

using the LR buttons and pressing ENTER. The possible options are OFF,
ON, and COUNT. If ON is selected the instrument measures continuously. If
COUNT is selected the instrument immediately begins measuring the number
of measurements given by the COUNT N number. The current measurement
status is always indicated on the status message line below the primary mea-
surement window (see Section 2.2.1.1).
The COUNT N parameter (1 to 32,767) specifies the number of measurements
to acquire before stopping when the MEASURE mode is set to COUNT. Use
the numeric buttons to enter a value and press ENTER.

29
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 2 Soft-key Menu System

INPUT
MEAS Set measurement control parameters
PRIM CHAN Select the primary input channel
SCAN CHAN Select input channels for scanning
SCAN MODE Select the scan mode
AVER Set input averaging
PROBE
EDIT PROBE Edit the probe parameters for a channel
COPY PROBE Copy probe parameters from one channel to another
TEST CONV Test the temperature conversion for a probe
OUTPUT
DISP WINDOW Set up the display window
STAT WINDOW View the statistical window
SET FIELDS Select data for the statistical window
GRAPH WINDOW View the graph window
CLEAR GRAPH Clear the graph window
SCROLL WINDOW View the scroll window
OUTPUT CHAN Select data for output channels
PRINT OUTPUT Control the output to printer devices
PRINT MEMORY Print data stored in memory
CLEAR STATS Clear the statistical functions
MODULE
SET UP SCREEN Set front panel screen parameters
SET UP DEVICE Set device parameters
CAL DEVICE Calibrate device
MODULE INFO View module information
SYSTEM
UNITS Select temperature units
TIME Set the time and date
PASSWORD Set the password lock-out options
SYSTEM INFO View system information
SYSTEM RESET Reset system parameters

30
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Input Menu

The DELAY parameter (0 to 32,767) sets the minimum delay time, in seconds,
between each measurement. Use the numeric buttons to enter a value and press
ENTER. Measurements may take longer than the specified delay time, if nec-
essary. This value also affects the time axis of the graph window.
The SEQ TIMER parameter (0 to 10,000) times the start of each scan sequence.
For instance, if SEQ TIMER is set to 300, the scan sequence will run once ev-
ery five minutes. If the SEQ timer value is 0, scanning will run continuously.
This applies only with the SCAN CHAN and SCAN/PRIM scan modes. The
SEQ TIMER value is ignored when the time scale of the graph display is calcu-
lated. Consider disabling the average function (Section 5.1.5) when using long
measurement intervals.

5.1.2 Primary Channel

The PRIM CHAN soft-key selects the primary input channel. The channel is
selected from a window showing a list of all available input channels. Each
channel in the list is identified with the device name, the channel number, and
probe serial number. The channel is selected using the UD buttons and press-
ing ENTER.

SELECT THE PRIMARY CHANNEL

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344

Selecting a primary channel will also set the SCAN MODE to PRIM CHAN
(see Section 5.1.4).

5.1.3 Scan Channels

The SCAN CHAN soft-key allows you to select channels to scan with the
SCAN and SCAN/PRIM measurement modes. A window shows a list of all
channels and the ON/OFF state of each. Only channels that are set to ON will
be measured when the SCAN MODE is SCAN or SCAN/PRIM. Each channel
in the list is identified with the device name and the channel number. You can
scroll through the list using the UD buttons. The indicated channel can be
toggled on or off using the LR buttons. It is not necessary to press ENTER.
Press EXIT to exit.

31
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SELECT CHANNELS TO SCAN

>SPRT 01: ON LR

SPRT 02: ON
TCS 03: ON
TCS 04: ON
TCS 05: ON
TCS 06: ON $

Selecting channels to scan will also set the SCAN MODE to SCAN CHAN.

5.1.4 Scan Mode

The SCAN MODE soft-key is used to set the input channel scan mode. The
available options for SCAN MODE are as follows:
PRIM CHAN: measure the primary channel only. The channel is selected with
the PRIM CHAN soft-key as explained in Section 5.1.2 above.
SCAN CHAN: measure selected scan channels in sequence. The channels are
selected with the SCAN CHAN soft-key as explained in Section 5.1.3 above.
SCAN/PRIM: measure selected scan channels while alternating with the pri-
mary channel. The scan channels are selected with the SCAN CHAN soft-key
as explained in Section 5.1.3 above. The primary channel is selected with the
PRIM CHAN soft-key as explained in Section 5.1.2 above.
Select the primary channel and enable scan channels prior to setting the scan
mode to this option.
The scan mode is selected using the LR buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT THE SCAN MODE

SCAN MODE: PRIM CHAN LR

5.1.5 Average
The AVER soft-key is used to set input averaging. This moving average filter is
useful for smoothing variations in the measurements and improving resolution.

32
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

The AVERAGE parameter determines whether averaging is disabled (OFF) or

enabled (ON). Use the LR buttons to select ON or OFF for AVERAGE and
press ENTER.
The COUNT parameter determines the number of raw measurements that are
averaged to produce the displayed measurement. The range is from 1 to 10. Use
the numeric buttons to enter a value for COUNT and press ENTER.

SET THE INPUT AVERAGING

AVERAGE: OFF
COUNT: 1

5.2 Probe Menu

The PROBE menu provides functions for selecting the type of temperature
conversion and setting the characterization coefficients for input channels. The
soft-key functions that appear in this menu are EDIT PROBE, COPY
PROBE, and TEST CONV. If the PROBE password option is set ON, you
must enter the correct password in order to access these functions (see Section
5.5.3). Use the numeric keys and ENTER to enter the four-digit password. If
the correct password is entered the PROBE menu appears.

PASSWORD REQUIRED FOR ACCESS.

PASSWORD: 0

5.2.1 Edit Probe

The EDIT PROBE soft-key allows you to enter probe characterization coeffi-
cients and other probe parameters for temperature calculation. First, you must
select the input channel. A window appears showing a list of input channels.
Each channel in the list is identified with the device name, the channel number,

33
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

and the probe serial number. The channel is selected using the UD buttons
and pressing ENTER.

SELECT A CHANNEL TO EDIT

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

After the channel is selected, a new window appears allowing you to edit the
probe parameters for the selected channel. The probe parameters include the
probe serial number, conversion type, and characterization coefficients and pa-
rameters. The available coefficients may change depending on the conversion
type that is selected.

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 566-011
CONVERSION: ITS-90
LO RANGE: 4
HI RANGE: 7
RTPW: 25.546738
A[4]: -1.5763669E-4 $

The PROBE SER# parameter is the serial number for the probe. The serial
number consists of a string of up to eight characters using any numeric digits,
letters, minus signs, and decimal points. Use the appropriate numeric buttons to
enter digits. Letters are entered by pressing the EXP button. Press this button
repeatedly until the desired letter appears.
The CONVERSION parameter specifies the conversion type. The entire list of
possible conversion types is given in Table 3. The conversion types available
for a given channel depend on the type of input as indicated in the table. The
conversions and related coefficients and parameters are explained in the follow-
ing sub-sections.

Table 3 Conversion Types

34
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

Sensor Type Conversion options

SPRT, PRT, and RTD R(Ω)

ITS-90 (default)
W(T90)

IPTS-68
CVD
POLYNOMIAL

Thermistor R(Ω)

THRM T(R)

THRM R(T) (default)

POLYNOMIAL

2564 module also has ITS-90

W(T90)

IPTS-68

CVD
Thermocouple V
TC-B

TC-E
TC-J
TC-K (default)

TC-N
TC-R
TC-S
TC-T
TC-AU/PT

TC-TABLE
TC-POLY
Others NONE (default)

POLYNOMIAL

You can move to any parameter in the window with the UD buttons. After en-
tering a value for a parameter, ENTER must be pressed. The window can be
exited by pressing EXIT. After the parameter editing window is exited, the SE-
LECT A CHANNEL TO EDIT screen reappears. You can select another chan-
nel to edit or press EXIT to return to the soft-key menu.

35
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

5.2.1.1 R(Ω) Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: R(Ω)

The R(Ω) conversion displays the measurement as resistance in ohms rather

than temperature.

5.2.1.2 ITS-90 Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: ITS-90
LO RG: 4, 83k - 273k
HI RG: 7, 273k - 933k
RTPW: 25.546738
A[4]: -1.5763669E-4 $

The ITS-90 conversion converts resistance to temperature according to the

ITS-90 specifications for SPRTs. Most PRTs and SPRTs are characterized ac-
cording to the International Temperature Scale of 1990 (ITS-90). For details
about the ITS-90 see NIST Technical Note 1265, Guidelines for Realizing the
International Temperature Scale of 1990. The user-defined parameters for the
ITS-90 conversion include two subranges (LO RG and HI RG), the triple point
of water resistance (RTPW), and various coefficients of the ITS-90 deviation
functions that are applicable for the selected subranges. If you select ITS-90 for
CONVERSION, you must then select one or two sub-ranges then enter the co-
efficients for the sub-ranges. You may select both a low temperature sub-range
and a high temperature sub-range. At temperatures where the high and low
ranges overlap, the low range takes precedence. If the probe is calibrated for
only one range, set the unused high or low range to NONE. If both sub-ranges
are set to NONE the temperature will be calculated using the ITS-90 reference
function. When using range 6 (273.15 to 1234.93K), note that you do not need
to enter the value for W(933.473K). This value is calculated automatically
based on the coefficients a6, b6, and c6.

36
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

5.2.1.3 W(T90) Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: W(T90)
RTPW: 25.412294

The W(T90) conversion displays the measurement in ITS-90 W(T90) values

rather than temperature. The one user-defined parameter for the W(T90) conver-
sion is the triple point of water resistance, RTPW.

5.2.1.4 IPTS-68 Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: IPTS-68
SCALE: IPTS-68
R0: 100.00845
ALPHA: 0.00391648
DELTA: 1.4872 $

The IPTS-68 conversion calculates temperature according to the IPTS-68 speci-

fications. Only subrange 4 is implemented for temperatures below zero. The
user-defined parameters for the IPTS-68 conversion are R0 (R0), ALPHA α,
DELTA (δ), A[4] (A4), C[4], (C4), and SCALE. The SCALE parameter deter-
mines whether the temperature values conform to IPTS-68 or ITS-90.

37
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

5.2.1.5 Callendar-Van Dusen Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: CVD
R0: 100.0
ALPHA: 0.00385
DELTA: 1.507
BETA: 0.111

The following equations are used for the Callendar-Van Dusen conversion:

⎧ ⎧ ⎡ t ⎛ t ⎞ ⎤⎫
⎪R0 ⎨1 + α ⎢t − δ ⎜
⎝
− 1⎟ ⎥⎬
⎠ ⎦⎭
t≥0
⎪ ⎩ ⎣ 100 100
r( t[ °C ]) = ⎨
⎧ ⎡ 3
⎤⎫
⎪R ⎪⎨1 + α t − δ t ⎛⎜ t − 1⎞⎟ − β ⎛⎜ t − 1⎞⎟ ⎛⎜ t ⎞⎟ ⎪⎬ t ≤ 0
⎢ ⎝100 ⎠ ⎝100 ⎠ ⎥⎪
⎪ ⎪ 100 ⎝100 ⎠
0
⎩ ⎩ ⎣ ⎦⎭

The user-defined parameters for the Callendar-Van Dusen conversion are R0

(R0), ALPHA (α), DELTA (δ), and BETA (β). The defaults are R0: 100.0,
ALPHA: 0.00385055, DELTA: 1.4998, and BETA: 0.109 which are applicable
with DIN-43760 or IEC-751 type RTDs.
Some probes may be provided with A, B, and C coefficients for the
Callendar-Van-Dusen equation in the following form:

⎧⎪R0 (1 + At + B 2 ) t≥0
r( t[ °C]) = ⎨
[
⎪⎩R0 1 + At + Bt + C ( t − 100)t
2 3
] t≤0

The A, B, and C coefficients can be converted to α, δ, and β coefficients using

the following formulas:

100 10 8 C
α = A + 100 B δ=− β=−
A
+1 A + 100 B
100 B

38
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

5.2.1.6 RTD Polynomial Conversion

EDIT SPRT 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: POLYNOMIAL
A[0]: -35.540960
A[1]: 0.36568108
A[2]: -1.884784E-4
A[3]: 7.26691E-6 $

The following equation is used for the RTD polynomial conversion:

10
t(r )[ °C ] = ∑ air i
i=o

The user-defined parameters for the polynomial conversion are A[0] (a0)
through A[10] (a10). Any unused coefficients should be set to 0.

5.2.1.7 Thermistor T(R) Conversion

EDIT STHR 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: THRM-T(R)
A[0]: -35.540960
A[1]: 0.36568108
A[2]: -1.884784E-4
A[3]: 7.26691E-6

The following Steinhart-Hart equation is used for the thermistor T(R)

conversion:

T(r )[ K ] = [ A0 + A1lnr + A2 ln 2 r + A3ln3r ]−1

The user-defined parameters for the thermistor T(R) conversion are A[0] (A0)
through A[3] (A3). If A2 is not used, as is the case with some calibrations, A[2]
should be set to 0.0.

39
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

5.2.1.8 Thermistor R(T) Conversion

EDIT STHR 01
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: THRM-R(T)
B[0]: -35.540960
B[1]: 0.36568108
B[2]: -1.884784E-4
B[3]: 7.26691E-6

The following Steinhart-Hart equation is used for the thermistor R(T)

conversion:

r( T[ K ]) = exp[ B0 + B1 T −1 + B2 T −2 + B3 T −3 ]
The user-defined parameters for the thermistor R(T) conversion are B[0] (B0)
through B[3] (B3). If B2 is not used, as is the case with some calibrations, B[2]
should be set to 0.0.

5.2.1.9 Thermocouple Volts Conversion

CHANNEL: TCS 3
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: V

The volts conversion for thermocouples displays the measurement in volts

rather than temperature.
The voltage readings are not compensated with the CJC value.
Note: When selecting volts as the conversion type for thermocouples, no
cold-junction compensation is available. The value measured and displayed is
the uncompensated voltage as sensed at the input of the module.

40
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

5.2.1.10 Standard Thermocouple Conversions

EDIT TCS 03
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: TC-K
CJC: INTERNAL
CJC TEMP: 0.0
CAL PTS: 3
T1: 500.0 $

NOTE: An Application Note for use of Tungsten-Rhenium and other

thermocouples is available at www.hartscientific.com.

Standard thermocouple conversions include types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, and

gold-platinum (AU/PT). Voltage is converted to temperature using standard ref-
erence functions. (For additional information consult the publication NIST
Monograph 175.)
The gold-platinum thermocouple conversion uses a ninth-order polynomial
with the following coefficients:

c0 = 0.0
c1 = 6.03619861
c2 = 1.93672974 X 10–2
c3 = –2.22998614 X 10–5
c4 = 3.28711859 X 10–8
c5 = –4.24206193 X 10–11
c6 = 4.56927038 X 10–14
c7 = –3.39430259 X 10–17
c8 = 1.42981590 X 10–20
c9 = –2.51672787 X 10–24

You can specify internal or external cold-junction compensation (CJC) with the
CJC parameter. If CJC is specified as internal, the CJC TEMP value is read
from the thermocouple input and is updated automatically; there is no need to
set this value. With external CJC, a reference junction at a known fixed temper-
ature is used and the value of this fixed temperature reference is used to calcu-
late the absolute temperature of the thermocouple. The CJC TEMP parameter
must be set, in degrees C, to the temperature of the external reference. If CJC is
specified as internal, the CJC TEMP parameter is ignored.

41
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Conversions for each of the thermocouple types accept optional calibration

data. This can be used to improve the measurement accuracy. CAL PTS indi-
cates the number of calibration points used, up to three. Tn is the temperature
of the point. ADJn is the temperature deviation from the reference function at
the point. The temperature measurement will be adjusted by this amount when
measuring at this temperature. A polynomial interpolation function is used for
measurements between calibration points. If calibration data is not available or
is not to be used, the ADJn parameters should all be set to 0.0. This will cause
the temperature to be calculated according to the standard reference functions.
Some thermocouple conversions (types R, S, and gold-platinum) also accept
polynomial calibration coefficients. This produces a temperature-dependent ad-
justment to the voltage according to the polynomial function:

ΔE ( t s [ °C])[μV ] = Δc1 t s + Δc2 t 2s

The probe parameters DC1 and DC2 are used to set the values of Δc1 and Δc2
respectively. If no calibration coefficients are available or if only the standard
reference function is to be used, DC1 and DC2 should be set to 0.0. If these co-
efficients are used, the ADJn parameters described above must be set to 0.

5.2.1.11 Thermocouple Table Conversion

EDIT TCS 03
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: TC-TABLE
CJC: INTERNAL
CJC TEMP: 0.0
TABLE PTS: 10
T1(C): -200.0 $

The thermocouple table conversion allows calculation of temperature by inter-

polating from a table. You can enter the temperatures (in °C) and voltages (in
V) from a reference or calibration table for one to ten points. The number of
points is specified by TABLE PTS. To calculate temperature, a polynomial in-
terpolation is done using up to four of the points in the table closest to the given
temperature or voltage. The zero point (0 V at 0°C) is automatically included in
the table whether it is explicitly specified or not.

42
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Probe Menu

5.2.1.12 Thermocouple Polynomial Conversion

EDIT TCS 03
PROBE SER#: 1
CONVERSION: TC-POLY
CJC: INTERNAL
C0: 0.0
CJC TEMP: 0.0
C1: 0.038562 $

NOTE: An Application Note for use of Tungsten-Rhenium and other

thermocouples is available at www.hartscientific.com.

The following equation is used for the thermocouple polynomial conversion:

15
E ( t[ °C])[μV ] = ∑ ci t i
i=1

NOTE: The EMF (E) in the above equation is in microvolts. If the cali-
bration equation for the coefficients of the probe being used is in milli-
volts, each coefficient needs to be multiplied by 1000 before entering the
coefficients into the instrument.

The user-defined parameters for the thermocouple polynomial conversion are

the coefficients C0 (c0) through C15 (c15). The user can specify internal or ex-
ternal cold-junction compensation (CJC). If external CJC is selected, the user
can enter the temperature of the CJC reference. DC1 and DC2 are only accessi-
ble when type R is used.

5.2.2 Copy Probe

The COPY PROBE soft-key can be used to copy an entire set of probe param-
eters from one input channel to another. The parameters are copied in two
steps—select the source channel then select the destination channel. A window
appears requesting you to select the source channel. Each channel in the list is
identified with the device name, the channel number, and the probe serial num-
ber. The list includes two USER channels that can be used for temporary stor-
age. The source channel is selected using the UD buttons and pressing Enter.

43
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SELECT THE CHANNEL TO COPY FROM

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

After the source channel is selected, a window appears requesting you to select
the destination channel. The destination channel is selected using the UD
buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT THE CHANNEL TO COPY TO

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

After the destination channel is selected, a window appears requesting you to

confirm the action. Press ENTER to proceed with copying the parameters or
press EXIT to cancel the operation. If ENTER is pressed, the probe parame-
ters will be copied from the source channel to the destination channel.

PARAMETERS FOR SPRT 01 WILL BE

OVERWRITTEN.
PRESS ENTER TO PROCEED OR
PRESS EXIT TO CANCEL.

If the source channel type and the destination channel type are incompatible
(e.g., PRT channel and TC channel), a message appears indicating that the in-
put types are incompatible and the copy function fails. User channels can be
used to temporarily store any type of channel.

44
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Output Menu

5.2.3 Test Conversion

The TEST CONV soft-key allows you to test the probe characterization algo-
rithm and characterization coefficients for a specific probe. You must first se-
lect the channel number of the probe. A window appears requesting you to
select the input channel. Each channel in the list is identified with the device
name, the channel number, and the probe serial number. The channel is selected
using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT A PROBE TO TEST

>SPRT 01, PROBE 566-011
SPRT 02, PROBE 566-012
TCS 03, PROBE 1341
TCS 04, PROBE 1342
TCS 05, PROBE 1343
TCS 06, PROBE 1344 $

After the probe is selected, a new window appears allowing you to test the tem-
perature calculation for the probe. You can enter an input value (e.g. resistance)
and the corresponding output value (e.g. temperature) will be shown. Press
EXIT to exit.

TEST CONVERSION
RESISTANCE: 100.0145
TEMP (C): 0.0101

5.3 Output Menu

The OUTPUT menu provides functions for controlling the display and output
of data. The soft-key functions that appear in this menu are DISP WINDOW,
OUTPUT CHAN, PRINT OUTPUT, PRINT MEMORY, and CLEAR
STATS.

45
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

5.3.1 Display Window Menu

The DISP WINDOW sub-menu provides functions for controlling the display
of data on the front panel screen. The soft-key functions that appear in this
sub-menu are STAT WINDOW, SET FIELDS, GRAPH WINDOW, CLEAR
GRAPH, and SCROLL WINDOW.

5.3.1.1 Statistical Window

The STAT WINDOW soft-key selects the statistical window for viewing. The
statistical window consists of eight programmable lines of data as shown be-
low. The data for each line is set up with the SET FIELDS function described
next.

Figure 8 Typical Statistical Display

5.3.1.2 Set Fields

The SET FIELDS soft-key allows you to select the data displayed on each of
the eight data fields of the statistical window. You are requested to select the
field to edit. The choices are 1 through 8. Use the numeric buttons to enter a
number and press ENTER.

46
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Output Menu

SELECT A DISPLAY FIELD

DISPLAY FIELD: 1

Next, a new window appears allowing you to select the data for the given field.

SELECT THE DATA FOR FIELD 1

+CHANNEL: 1
–CHANNEL: 0
CALCULATION: TEMP

CHANNEL 0=NONE
CHANNEL 99=ALL

+CHANNEL specifies the input channel for the positive component of the dif-
ference calculation. –CHANNEL specifies the input channel for the negative
component of the difference calculation. You may enter 0 to ignore that part of
the calculation or 99 to apply the most recent measurement regardless of chan-
nel. Use the numeric buttons to enter a number and press ENTER.
CALCULATION specifies the type of calculation for which the results are dis-
played. The options are given in Table 4 below. The calculation is selected us-
ing the LR buttons and pressing ENTER.

47
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 4 CALCULATION option.

TEMP results of the temperature conversion

INPUT measurement before conversion
AVERAGE statistical average of temperature
STD DEV statistical standard deviation of temperature
MINIMUM statistical minimum of temperature
MAXIMUM statistical maximum of temperature
SPREAD statistical spread of temperature
N number of samples

Each data field displays the results of the specified calculation type for the
+CHANNEL input channel minus the results for the –CHANNEL input chan-
nel. For instance, if +CHANNEL is 2, –CHANNEL is 1, and CALCULATION
is AVERAGE, the data field will show the average for input channel 2 minus
the average for input channel 1. If either channel is specified as 0 it will be ig-
nored for that part of the calculation. For instance, if +CHANNEL is 1,
–CHANNEL is 0, and CALCULATION is INPUT, the data field will simply
show the resistance or voltage for input channel 1. If both channels are 0 the
data field will show 0. Measurements are displayed with the units, the channel
number or numbers for difference calculations, and calculation type.

5.3.1.3 Graph Window

The GRAPH WINDOW soft-key selects the graph type window for viewing.
The graph window shows a plot of measurements over time as shown in Figure
9. The graph type window plots all temperature measurements regardless of
channel. The vertical axis scales automatically. The time scale for the graph de-
pends on the DELAY setting of the MEAS function (see Section 5.1.1). The
time scale, in minutes, is three times the DELAY setting or 6 whichever is
larger. The graph is cleared using the CLEAR GRAPH function described
next.

48
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Output Menu

Figure 9 Typical Graph Window Display

5.3.1.4 Clear Graph

The CLEAR GRAPH soft-key clears the graph. Subsequent measurements are
plotted starting from the far left side of the window.

5.3.1.5 Scrolling Window

The SCROLL WINDOW soft-key selects the scrolling type window for view-
ing. The scrolling window operates as a terminal screen, displaying each new
measurement on the top line of the window and scrolling previous measure-
ments down one line as shown below. Each line displays one measurement with
the channel number, value, units, and time in 24-hour format (see Figure 10.

49
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Figure 10 Typical Scrolling Display

5.3.2 Output Channel

The OUTPUT CHAN soft-key allows you to select the type of data sent to any
output channel. First, you are requested to select the output channel. The chan-
nel is selected from a window showing a list of output channels. Each output
channel is shown with the device name and channel number. The channel is se-
lected using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT AN OUTPUT CHANNEL

>AOUT 02

After the channel is selected, a new window appears allowing you to select the
data.

50
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Output Menu

SELECT THE DATA FOR OUTPUT 01

+CHANNEL: 1
–CHANNEL: 0
CALCULATION: TEMP

CHANNEL 0=NONE
CHANNEL 99=ALL

+CHANNEL specifies the input channel for the positive component of the dif-
ference calculation. –CHANNEL specifies the input channel for the negative
component of the difference calculation. You may enter 0 to ignore that part of
the calculation or 99 to apply the most recent measurement regardless of chan-
nel. Use the numeric buttons to enter a number and press ENTER.
CALCULATION specifies the type of calculation for which the results are dis-
played. The options are given in Table 4 above. The desired option is selected
using the LR buttons and pressing ENTER.
The value sent to the output channel is the result of the specified calculation
type for the +CHANNEL input channel minus the results for the –CHANNEL
input channel. For instance, if +CHANNEL is 2, –CHANNEL is 1, and CAL-
CULATION is AVERAGE, the value will be the average for input channel 2
minus the average for input channel 1. If either channel is specified as 0 it will
be ignored for that part of the calculation. For instance, if +CHANNEL is1,
–CHANNEL is 0, and CALCULATION is INPUT the value will simply be the
resistance or voltage of input channel 1. If both channels are 0 no data will be
output.
The calculation and transmission of data to any output channel occurs any time
either of the specified input channels is measured.

5.3.3 Print Output

The PRINT OUTPUT soft-key allows you to control the printing of measure-
ments to any printer output device. A window appears allowing you to enable
or disable printing to any printer device. You can scroll through the list using
the UD buttons. The indicated printer device can be toggled on or off using
the LR buttons. You do not need to press ENTER. Press EXIT to exit.

51
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

ENABLE PRINTING TO DEVICES

>SERI 0: ON LR

PRNT 4: ON

Each time a new measurement is produced and displayed on the screen in the
primary output window it is also sent to all enabled printer devices. Each mea-
surement is printed with the channel number, measurement value, unit prefix,
unit, time (in 24-hour format), and date.

5.3.4 Print Memory

The PRINT MEMORY soft-key prints measurements stored in memory to any
printer output device. Up to 1000 of the most recent measurements can be
printed. (The storage capacity of the memory may be reduced if many input
channels are added.) You are requested to select a printer device. You can scroll
through the list using the UD buttons. The indicated printer device is selected
by pressing ENTER.

SELECT PRINTER DEVICE

>SERI 0
SERC 4

Next, you must enter the number of measurements to print. Use the numeric
buttons to enter a value from 1 to 1000 and press ENTER.

52
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Module Menu

ENTER THE NUMBER TO PRINT

PRINT N: 1

A message appears requesting you to press ENTER to begin printing. Press

ENTER to continue or EXIT to abort. As the measurements are printed, a
message window appears to indicate that printing is in process. You can cancel
the operation at any time by pressing EXIT.
The last PRINT N number of measurements stored in memory will be printed
to the selected output device. If the number of measurements available is less
than the PRINT N number, only the available measurements will be printed.
Printing the measurements from memory does not affect the data stored in
memory. Each measurement is printed with the channel number, measurement
value, unit prefix, unit, time (in 24-hour format), and date. Use the SET UP
DEVICE soft-key function (see Section 5.4.2) to configure printer port options
such as baud rate or linefeed enable.

5.3.5 Clear Statistics

The CLEAR STATS soft-key clears the statistical registers and resets all statis-
tical calculations. Refer to Sections 5.3.1.1 and 5.3.1.2 to display statistical
data. A message appears briefly at the bottom of the screen indicating the stats
have been cleared.

5.4 Module Menu

The MODULE menu provides functions for setting module operating condi-
tions, executing functions built in to the modules, setting module calibration
parameters, executing module calibration routines, and viewing information re-
lating to the modules. The soft-key functions that appear in this menu are SET
UP SCREEN, SET UP DEVICE, CAL DEVICE, and MODULE INFO.

5.4.1 Set Up Screen

The SET UP SCREEN soft-key function is used to set physical parameters re-
lating to the screen such as brightness and screen saver.

53
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SET THE SCREEN CONTROLS

BRIGHTNESS: 0.90 LR

SCREEN SAVER: 0

The LR buttons can be used to adjust the brightness. Pressing ENTER

moves down to the screen saver parameter. You can enter a time period, in min-
utes, for the screen saver. The display backlight will turn off after this period of
time if no activity occurs with the front panel buttons. Any button pressed re-
stores the backlight. A value of 0 for the screen saver disables it. The range is 0
to 60 min.

5.4.2 Set Up Device

The SET UP DEVICE soft-key function is used for accessing parameters and
functions contained within the add-on modules. First, you must select the de-
vice to set (remember a module may contain more than one independent de-
vice). A window appears showing a list of devices. The list includes the names
of all devices including the internal serial communications device (SERI). Each
device is followed by the address of the module that contains it. The device is
selected using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

SELECT A DEVICE TO SET UP

>SERI 0
SPRT 1
TCS 2
PRTS 3
GPIB 4
SERC 4 $

After the device is selected, another window appears showing the parameters
and functions available from the device. These depend on the device. The set
up device window might appear as follows:

54
 5 Soft-Key Functions
Module Menu

SET UP DEVICE: PRNT 4

>LINEFEED: ON LR

FORM FEED: NO

If there are no setup commands for a particular device, the window shows “NO
SETUP OPTIONS FOR THIS DEVICE.”
You can scroll through the setup parameters using the UD buttons. The values
of parameters can be changed using the numeric keys or the LR buttons as
is appropriate for the parameter type. Press ENTER to set the parameter.
With function commands you can use the LR buttons to change “NO” to
“YES” and then press ENTER to execute the function. If ENTER is pressed
with “NO” nothing will happen except the cursor will move down to the next
line. Press EXIT to exit.

5.4.3 Calibrate Device

The CAL DEVICE soft-key function is used for accessing module parameters
and functions relating to device calibration. This function may be selectively
locked out using the password feature (see Section 5.5.3 below). If the CAL
DEVICE password option is set ON, in order to access this function you must
enter the correct four-digit password. A screen appears requesting the pass-
word. Use the numeric keys and ENTER to enter the password. If the correct
password is entered, the CAL DEVICE function continues.

PASSWORD REQUIRED FOR ACCESS.

PASSWORD:

A window appears showing a list of devices. The list includes the names of all
devices followed by the position number of the module to which it belongs.
The device is selected using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

55
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SELECT A DEVICE TO CALIBRATE

>SPRT 1
TCS 2
PRTS 3
GPIB 4
PRNT 4
AOUT 4 $

After the device is selected, another window appears showing the parameters
and functions available from the device. These depend on the device. The de-
vice calibration window might appear as follows:

CALIBRATE DEVICE: SPRT

0 ADJ: 0.0
100 ADJ: 0.0
400 ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 05-21-96
SER NUM: 123456

If there are no calibration commands for a particular device the window shows
“NO CALIBRATION OPTIONS FOR THIS DEVICE.”
You can scroll through the calibration parameters using the UD buttons. The
values of parameters can be changed using the numeric keys or the LR but-
tons as is appropriate for the parameter type. Press ENTER to set the
parameter.
With function commands you can use the LR buttons to change “NO” to
“YES” and then press ENTER to execute the function. If ENTER is pressed
with “NO” nothing will happen except the cursor will move down to the next
line. Press EXIT to exit.

5.4.4 Module Information

The MODULE INFO soft-key function displays information about a module.
This includes the module name, model number, firmware version number, and
the names of devices it contains with the class and number of channels for each
device (remember a module may contain more than one independent device).
First, you must select the module. A window appears showing a list of mod-
ules. Each module is followed by the module number. The module is selected
using the UD buttons and pressing ENTER.

56
 5 Soft-Key Functions
System Menu

SELECT A MODULE
>SPRT 1
TCS 2
PRTS 3
COMM 4

The information for the selected module then appears as follows:

SPRT MODULE, MODEL 2560

FIRMWARE VERSION: 1.10
DEVICES:
SPRT INPUT, 2 CHANNELS

The name of the module is given, followed by its model number. The next line
shows the firmware version number for the module. Following this is a list of
devices contained by the module. Each device is listed with its name, class (i.e.
“INPUT”, “OUTPUT”, “PRINT”, or “COMM”), and the number of channels it
contains. If the list is too long to fit on one screen the UD buttons can be used
to scroll the list. Press EXIT or ENTER to exit.

5.5 System Menu

The SYSTEM menu provides general system functions. The soft-key functions
that appear in this menu are UNITS, TIME, PASSWORD, SYSTEM INFO,
and SYSTEM RESET.

5.5.1 Units
The UNITS soft-key is used to set the units for temperature measurements. The
options are degrees Celsius (C), degrees Fahrenheit (F), or Kelvin (K). A win-
dow appears allowing you to set the units. The units are selected using the
LR buttons and pressing ENTER. Press EXIT to exit.

57
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SELECT THE TEMPERATURE UNITS

UNITS: C LR

Measurements can also be displayed as resistance or voltage in ohms or volts.

Use the CONVERSION options with the EDIT PROBE soft-key function in
the PROBE menu to select resistance or voltage rather than temperature for a
particular probe (see Section 5.2.1).

5.5.2 Time
The TIME soft-key is used to set the time-of-day clock. The time is displayed
on the screen and printed with measurement data. A window appears allowing
you to set the time and date. Use the numeric keys or the LR buttons as ap-
propriate for the parameter type. Press ENTER to set the value. Press EXIT to
exit.

SET THE TIME

HOURS: 11
MINUTES: 14
AM/PM: AM
DAY: 1
MONTH: 1
YEAR: 99

5.5.3 Password
The PASSWORD soft-key function allows you to select menu password pro-
tection options and change the password. In order to access this function you
must enter the current four-digit password. A screen appears requesting the
password. The default password is “1560”.

58
 5 Soft-Key Functions
System Menu

PASSWORD REQUIRED FOR ACCESS.

PASSWORD:

Use the numeric keys and ENTER to enter the password. If the correct pass-
word is entered, the password settings window will appear allowing you to
change any of the password options.

SET PASSWORD OPTIONS

>PROBE: OFF LR

CAL DEVICE: ON
PASSWORD: 1560

The PROBE option controls access to the functions in the PROBE menu. If the
option is ON, access to the PROBE menu requires you to enter the correct pass-
word. The default is OFF. You can change the option using the LR buttons
and pressing ENTER.
The CAL DEVICE option controls access to the device calibration function in
the MODULE menu. If the option is ON, access to the CAL DEVICE menu
function requires you to enter the correct password. The default is ON. You can
change the option using the LR buttons and pressing ENTER.
The PASSWORD option allows you to change the password. You can change
the password by typing in a four-digit number using the numeric buttons ‘0’
through ‘9’ and pressing ENTER.

Be careful when changing the password. Make a note of your new password and
keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.

5.5.4 System Information

The SYSTEM INFO soft-key function displays system information as follows:

59
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

THE
MODEL 1560
HART SCIENTIFIC
FIRMWARE VERSION: 1.20
MODULES:
SPRT-2560 $

The window shows the product name, model number, manufacturer, and firm-
ware version number. It also shows a list of installed modules. The modules are
listed one per line with the module name and model number. If the list is too
long to fit on one screen the UD buttons can be used to scroll the list. Press
EXIT or ENTER to exit.

5.5.5 System Reset

The SYSTEM RESET function resets operating parameters to default values. It
has the following effects:
• Sets the measure mode to off.
• Sets the COUNT N number to 1.
• Sets the measure delay to 0.
• Sets the primary channel to input channel 1.
• Sets the scan channel list to include all channels.
• Sets the scan mode to primary channel.
• Sets input average to off.
• Disables routing to all output channels by setting the positive input chan-
nel number to 0, the negative input channel number to 0, and the calcula-
tion type to temperature.
• Sets printing to all printer interface devices to off.
• Clears the statistical functions.
• Sets units to C.
Reset does not affect any of the probe characterization parameters, module
setup parameters, or module calibration parameters. A window will appear to
warn you that parameters will be changed. Press ENTER to reset the parame-
ters or press EXIT to cancel.

60
 5 Soft-Key Functions
System Menu

RESET SYSTEM PARAMETERS

PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
PRESS EXIT TO CANCEL

61
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Overview

6 Digital Communications Interface

6.1 Overview
External communications allows an external device, such as a computer, to
communicate with the 1560 to obtain measurement data and control operating
conditions. Communication is accomplished with various commands issued to
the 1560 through any of its bi-directional communication ports. This may be
through the RS-232 port, IEEE-488 port, or any other add-on module device
designated as a communications class device.

6.2 Serial Interface

The 1560 includes one RS-232 serial port. It is located underneath the 1560.
Wiring of the interface cable should be as shown in the diagram in Figure 11.
The protocol for RS-232 communications is 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no
parity.
The baud rate, duplex mode,
and linefeed option are pro-
grammable. These parame-
ters are accessed using the
SET UP DEVICE soft-key
in the MODULE menu. Se-
lect the SERI 0 device and
press ENTER. Use the
lLR buttons to change
any of the parameters and
press ENTER. BAUDRATE
selects the data rate. It must
match the data rate of the
computer or external device.
DUPLEX determines
whether characters are im-
mediately echoed back
(FULL) to the transmitting
device or not (HALF). LINE-
FEED determines whether a
linefeed character is trans-
mitted in addition to the car-
riage return character.
All commands sent to the
1560 through the serial inter-
face must be terminated with
a carriage return or linefeed
character. Figure 11 RS-232 Cable Wiring

63
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.3 Command Syntax

The 1560 accepts commands that set parameters, execute functions or respond
with requested data. These commands are in the form of strings of ASCII-en-
coded characters. As far as possible, the 1560 conforms to IEEE-488.2, 1992
and SCPI-1994. One notable exception is that compound commands are not al-
lowed as explained below.
Commands consist of a command header and, if necessary, parameter data. All
commands must be terminated with either a carriage return (ASCII 0D hex or
13 decimal) or newline character (ASCII 0A hex or 10 decimal).
Command headers consist of one or more mnemonics separated by colons (:).
Mnemonics may use letter characters, the underscore character (_), and possi-
bly numeric digits as well. There is no distinguishing between upper and lower
case letters. Mnemonics often have alternate forms. Most mnemonics have a
long form that is more readable and a short form consisting of three or four
characters that is more efficient.
A mnemonic may end with a numeric suffix that specifies one of a set of inde-
pendent function blocks such as input channel data paths. If a numeric suffix is
omitted when a particular block must be specified, a suffix of one is assumed.
Query commands are commands that request data in response. Query com-
mands have a question mark (?) immediately following the command header.
Responses to query commands are generated immediately and placed in the
output buffer. Responses will be lost if not read before the next command is re-
ceived. The input and output buffers can each hold up to 100 characters.
Some commands require parameter data to specify values for one or more pa-
rameters. Parameter data follows the command header with a space (ASCII 20
hex or 32 decimal) between. Multiple parameters are separated by a comma (,).
Parameter data are of one of several types. Numeric data uses ASCII characters
to represent numbers. Numbers may contain a sign (‘+’ or ‘-’), decimal point
(‘.’), and exponent (‘E’ or ‘e’) with its sign. If a fractional component is re-
ceived when only an integer is required, the number is rounded to the nearest
integer without any resulting error message. Some commands may accept a
character mnemonic as a number. The mnemonics DEF, MIN, and MAX are
often acceptable for the default, minimum, and maximum value respectively.
Unit suffixes, such as V or OHM, can be appended to numeric parameters and
are accepted without error but ignored.
Boolean parameters have the values of 0 or 1. The mnemonics OFF and ON are
also accepted for 0 and 1 respectively.
Character data are mnemonics that represents one of several possible values.
For instance, temperature units may be specified with CEL for Celsius or FAR
for Fahrenheit.
String data consist of characters enclosed in double quotes. A null string con-
sists of double quotes with no characters enclosed.

64
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Command Summary

Unrecognized commands or commands with incorrect syntax or invalid param-

eters generate error messages in the error queue as explained in Section
6.5.10.22.
The 1560 does not allow compound commands (multiple commands per line
separated with semicolons).
All commands are sequential. The execution of each command is completed
before subsequent commands are processed.

6.4 Command Summary

An alphabetical listing of the commands implemented by the 1560 are shown
in Table 5 starting on page 66. All commands are available with the current
firmware version. Some commands may not be available with previous ver-
sions. (See Section 5.5.4 to determine the version number using the MODULE
INFO soft-key.) The section under which the command is explained is given
for each command.

6.5 Commands
This section explains each of the commands that can be used with the 1560.
The commands are arranged into the following groups:
• Measurement Data Commands
• Measurement Control Commands
• Input Channel Commands
• Probe Commands
• Output Channel Commands
• Printer Commands
• Communication Interface Commands
• Module Commands
• System Commands
• Status Commands

6.5.1 Measurement Data Commands

This group of commands deals with reading measurement data from the 1560.
These commands are summarized in Table 9.

6.5.1.1 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar
This command clears the statistical functions of the specified channel. The
CALCulate suffix number specifies the channel number. Its range is 1 to 96. If
it is omitted it is assumed to be channel 1. The AVERage suffix number, if

65
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 5 Command Summary

Command Reference
*CLS Section 6.5.10.1 page 102
*ESE <numeric_value> Section 6.5.10.2 page 102
*ESE? Section 6.5.10.3 page 103
*ESR? Section 6.5.10.4 page 103
*IDN? Section 6.5.9.1 page 99
*OPC Section 6.5.10.5 page 103
*OPC? Section 6.5.10.6 page 104
*OPT? Section 6.5.9.2 page 100
*RST Section 6.5.9.3 page 100
*SRE <numeric_value> Section 6.5.10.7 page 104
*SRE? Section 6.5.10.8 page 105
*STB? Section 6.5.10.9 page 105
*TST? Section 6.5.10.10 page
106
*WAI Section 6.5.10.11 page
106
ABORt Section 6.5.2.1 page 74
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar Section 6.5.1.1 page 65
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar:ALL Section 6.5.1.2 page 70
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:DATA? Section 6.5.1.3 page 70
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n][:STATe]? Section 6.5.1.4 page 71
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:TYPE? Section 6.5.1.5 page 71
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:CATalog? Section 6.5.4.1 page 82
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:COPY <channel> Section 6.5.4.2 page 83
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:DATA? Section 6.5.4.3 page 83
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME <conversion_name> Section 6.5.4.4 page 83
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME? Section 6.5.4.5 page 85
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:CATalog? Section 6.5.4.6 page 85
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue <parameter_name>,<nu- Section 6.5.4.7 page 85
meric_value>
[;<parameter_name>,<numeric_value> . . . ]
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? <parameter_name> Section 6.5.4.8 page 85
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? ALL Section 6.5.4.9 page 86
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber <serial_number> Section 6.5.4.10 page 86
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber? Section 6.5.4.11 page 86
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow <sub-range_number> Section 6.5.4.12 page 86
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow? Section 6.5.4.13 page 86

66
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Table 6 Command Summary continued

Command Reference
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh <sub-range_number> Section 6.5.4.14 page 87
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh? Section 6.5.4.15 page 87
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:TEST? Section 6.5.4.16 page 87
<numeric_parameter>[,<numeric_parameter>]
CONFigure[<channel>] Section 6.5.1.6 page 71
CONFigure? Section 6.5.1.7 page 72
DATA[:DATA]:VALue? [MEM],<numeric_value> Section 6.5.1.8 page 72
DATA:POINts? Section 6.5.1.9 page 72
FETCh[:TEMPerature]? [<channel >] Section 6.5.1.10 page 73
HCOPy:ABORt Section 6.5.6.1 page 91
HCOPy[:IMMediate] <printer_number> Section 6.5.6.2 page 91
HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe] <Boolean> Section 6.5.6.3 page 91
HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe]? Section 6.5.6.4 page 92
INITiate:CONTinuous <Boolean> Section 6.5.2.3 page 75
INITiate:CONTinuous? Section 6.5.2.4 page 75
INITiate[:IMMediate] Section 6.5.2.2 page 74
MEASure[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>] Section 6.5.1.11 page 73
OUTPut[n]:CALC <numeric_value> Section 6.5.5.1 page 88
OUTPut[n]:CALC? Section 6.5.5.2 page 88
OUTPut[n]:NCHannel <channel> Section 6.5.5.3 page 89
OUTPut[n]:NCHannel? Section 6.5.5.4 page 89
OUTPut[n]:PCHannel <channel> Section 6.5.5.5 page 89
OUTPut[n]:PCHannel? Section 6.5.5.6 page 90
OUTPut[n][:STATe] <Boolean> Section 6.5.5.7 page 90
OUTPut[n][:STATe]? Section 6.5.5.8 page 90
READ[:TEMPerature]? Section 6.5.1.12 page 73
ROUTe:CLOSe <channel> Section 6.5.3.1 page 78
ROUTe:CLOSe:STATe? Section 6.5.3.2 page 78
ROUTe:PRIMary? Section 6.5.3.3 page 78
ROUTe:SCAN:ALT Section 6.5.3.4 page 79
ROUTe:SCAN:ALT? Section 6.5.3.5 page 79
ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST] <channel_list> Section 6.5.3.6 page 79
ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST]? Section 6.5.3.7 page 79
ROUTe:SCAN:STATe <Boolean> Section 6.5.3.8 page 80
ROUTe:SCAN:STATe? Section 6.5.3.9 page 80
SENSe[n]:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value> Section 6.5.2.5 page 75

67
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 7 Command Summary continued

Command Reference
SENSe[n]:AVERage:COUNt? Section 6.5.2.6 page 76
SENSe[n]:AVERage:DATA? Section 6.5.1.13 page 74
SENSe[n]:AVERage[:STATe] <Boolean> Section 6.5.2.7 page 76
SENSe[n]:AVERage[:STATe]? Section 6.5.2.8 page 76
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Section 6.5.10.12 page
106
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <numeric_value> Section 6.5.10.13 page
106
STATus:OPERation:ENABle? Section 6.5.10.14 page
107
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Section 6.5.10.15 page
107
STATus:PRESet Section 6.5.10.16 page
107
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? Section 6.5.10.17 page
107
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <numeric_value> Section 6.5.10.18 page
108
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? Section 6.5.10.19 page
108
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? Section 6.5.10.20 page
108
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? Section 6.5.10.21 page
108
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD <numeric_value> Section 6.5.7.1 page 92
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD? Section 6.5.7.2 page 92
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUPlex <Boolean> Section 6.5.7.3 page 92
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUPlex? Section 6.5.7.4 page 93
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed <Boolean> Section 6.5.7.5 page 93
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed? Section 6.5.7.6 page 93
SYSTem:CONFigure:CDEVice? Section 6.5.8.1 page 94
SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:DADDress? Section 6.5.8.2 page 94
SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:MADDress? Section 6.5.8.3 page 95
SYSTem:CONFigure:ICHannel? Section 6.5.8.4 page 95
SYSTem:CONFigure:IDEVice? Section 6.5.8.5 page 95
SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:DADDress? Section 6.5.8.6 page 95
SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:MADDress? Section 6.5.8.7 page 95
SYSTem:CONFigure:MNUMber? Section 6.5.8.8 page 96
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:INFormation? Section 6.5.8.9 page 96

68
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Table 8 Command Summary continued

Command Reference
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DNUMber? Section 6.5.8.10 page 96
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:INFormation? Section 6.5.8.11 page 96
SYSTem:CONFigure:OCHannel? Section 6.5.8.12 page 97
SYSTem:CONFigure:ODEVice? Section 6.5.8.13 page 97
SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:DADDress? Section 6.5.8.14 page 97
SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:MADDress? Section 6.5.8.15 page 97
SYSTem:CONFigure:PDEVice? Section 6.5.8.16 page 97
SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:DADDress? Section 6.5.8.17 page 98
SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:MADDress? Section 6.5.8.18 page 98
SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day> Section 6.5.9.4 page 100
SYSTem:DATE? Section 6.5.9.5 page 101
SYSTem:ERRor? Section 6.5.10.22 page
108
SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:READ? <device_command> Section 6.5.8.19 page 98
SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:WRITe <device_command>[,<parameter>] Section 6.5.8.20 page 98
SYSTem:SNUMber <serial_number> Section 6.5.9.6 page 101
SYSTem:SNUMber? Section 6.5.9.7 page 101
SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second> Section 6.5.9.8 page 101
SYSTem:TIME? Section 6.5.9.9 page 101
SYSTem:VERSion? Section 6.5.9.10 page 101
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt <numeric_value> Section 6.5.2.9 page 76
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt? Section 6.5.2.10 page 76
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value> Section 6.5.2.11 page 77
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay? Section 6.5.2.12 page 77
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer <numeric_value> Section 6.5.2.13 page 77
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer? Section 6.5.2.14 page 77
UNIT:TEMPerature C|CEL|F|FAR|K Section 6.5.9.11 page 102
UNIT:TEMPerature? Section 6.5.9.12 page 102

69
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 9 Measurement Data Commands

Command Action
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar Clear the statistics functions for one channel
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar:ALL Clear the statistics functions for all channels
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:DATA? Return a statistical value for a channel
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n][:STATe]? Return the state of a statistical calculation
CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:TYPE? Return the type of statistical calculation
CONFigure[<channel>] Select the input channel to measure
CONFigure? Query measurement function
DATA[:DATA]:VALue? [MEM,]<numeric_value> Return one measurement in memory
DATA:POINts? Query the memory array size
FETCh[:TEMPerature]? Return the most recent measurement
MEASure[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>] Acquire and return one new measurement
READ[:TEMPerature]? Acquire and return one new measurement
SENSe[n]:AVERage:DATA? Return resistance or voltage

given, is ignored as this command clears all the statistical functions for the
specified channel regardless.
Example command: CALC3:AVER:CLE

6.5.1.2 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:CLEar:ALL
This command simultaneously clears the statistical functions for all channels.
The CALCulate suffix number and AVERage suffix number, if given, are ig-
nored as this command clears all the statistical functions for all channels
regardless.
Example command: CALC:AVER:CLE:ALL

6.5.1.3 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:DATA?
This query command returns the value of a statistical calculation for a channel.
The CALCulate suffix number specifies the input channel number. Its range is
1 to 96. If it is omitted it is assumed to be channel 1.The AVERage suffix num-
ber specifies the calculation type as shown in Table 10. If it is omitted it is as-
sumed to be type 1 which is the average. The response is a single numeric value
that is the most recent results of the specified calculation for the specified chan-
nel. The following example reads the standard deviation of measurements of in-
put channel 3.

70
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Table 10 Statistical Calculation Types

No: Type Keyword

1 average AVER
2 standard deviation SDEV
3 minimum MIN
4 maximum MAX
5 spread SPR
6 n N

Example command: CALC3:AVER2:DATA?

Example response: 0.00017

6.5.1.4 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n][:STATe]?
This query command returns the state of the calculation. It is implemented for
compatibility. It always returns 1 since the statistical calculations cannot be dis-
abled with this instrument.

6.5.1.5 CALCulate[n]:AVERage[n]:TYPE?
This query command returns the type of the calculation for the given type num-
ber. The CALCulate suffix number is optional and if given is ignored as all
channels have the same statistical calculations. The AVERage suffix number
specifies the type of the statistical calculation. The response corresponding to
the type number is the character word shown in Table 5 under Keyword.
Example command: CALC:AVER2:TYPE?
Example response: SDEV

6.5.1.6 CONFigure[<channel>]
The CONF command is often used in multi-function instruments to set the
measurement function and input channels. The 1560 has only one measurement
function, temperature, but input channels can be selected using this command.
It causes the following actions:
• Sets the measure mode to off (INITiate:CONTinuous OFF).
• Sets the COUNT N number to 1.
• Sets the DELAY time to 0.
• Sets the primary input channel to the specified channel.

71
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

• Sets the scan mode to primary channel.

If an input channel is specified, the primary channel is set to that channel and
the scan mode is set to measure the primary channel only. If multiple channels
are specified the first channel in the list is accepted as the primary channel and
the others are ignored.
The <channel> parameter is enclosed in parentheses with the symbol @ follow-
ing the opening parenthesis. For example, (@5) would be used to select input
channel 5.
Example command: CONF (@3)

6.5.1.7 CONFigure?
This query command returns the measurement type and input channel numbers.
“TEMP” is returned for the measurement type showing that the measurement
function of the 1560 is temperature. A list of selected channels follows. The re-
sponse is in the following format:
“TEMP <channel_list>“
The channel list is preceded with @ and enclosed in parentheses. Channel num-
bers are separated by commas. The returned channel list depends on the scan
mode. If scanning is off, the primary channel number will be returned. If scan-
ning is on the list of selected channels for scanning will be returned.
Example command: CONF?
Example response: “TEMP (@3)”

6.5.1.8 DATA[:DATA]:VALue? [MEM,]<numeric_value>

This command returns one measurement stored in memory at the specified lo-
cation given by <numeric_value>. The range of <numeric_value> is 1 to 1000.
(The actual storage capacity of memory may be less than 1000 depending on
the number of input channels added.) Specifying the data array name, MEM, is
optional. The measurement is returned with the following format:
<channel number>,<measurement value>,
<units>,<year>,<month>,<day>, <hours>,<minutes>,<seconds>

Example command: DATA:VAL? 10

Example response: 3,0.0115,C,1996,3,12,11,43,22

6.5.1.9 DATA:POINts? [MEM]

This query command returns the number of data points stored in memory.
Specifying the data array name, MEM, is optional.
Example command: DATA:POIN?
Example response: 115

72
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.1.10 FETCh[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>]

This query command returns the most recent measurement. If an input channel
is specified the response is the most recent measurement for that channel. The
<channel> number is preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. For example,
(@5) would be used to select input channel 5. If multiple channels are speci-
fied, only the first channel in the list is accepted and the others are ignored. If
no channel is specified this command returns the most recent measurement re-
gardless of channel. Other parameters are accepted with this command for
compatibility but are ignored. The FETC? command does not affect the mea-
surement action as does the MEAS? and READ? commands explained below.
Example command: FETC? (@3)
Example response: 0.0127

6.5.1.11 MEASure[:TEMPerature]? [<channel>]

This command allows you to select channels, acquire a new measurement, and
receive the measurement data using just one command. It causes the following
actions:
• Sets the measure mode to off (INITiate:CONTinuous OFF).
• Sets the COUNT N number to 1.
• Sets the DELAY time to 0.
• Sets the primary channel to the specified channel.
• Sets the scan mode to primary channel.
• Acquires one measurement (INITiate:IMMediate), waiting until complete.
• Returns the value of the measurement.
If the channel number is omitted the current primary channel will be used. The
<channel> number is preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. For example,
(@5) would be used to select input channel 5.
Example command: MEAS? (@3)
Example response: 0.0127

6.5.1.12 READ[:TEMPerature]?
This command begins a new measurement and responds with the measurement
value when finished. For this instrument, it is equivalent to the MEAS? com-
mand without a specified channel. It causes the following actions:
• Sets the measure mode to off (INITiate:CONTinuous OFF).
• Sets the COUNT N number to 1.
• Sets the DELAY time to 0.
• Sets the scan mode to primary channel.

73
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

• Acquires one measurement from the primary channel, waiting until com-
plete.
• Returns the value of the measurement.

Example command: READ?

Example response: 0.0113

6.5.1.13 SENSe[n]:AVERage:DATA?
This query command returns a measurement value from the input average
block of a given input channel. The measurement is returned as a resistance or
voltage rather than a converted temperature. The measurement value is an aver-
age of a number of previous measurements where the average number depends
on the setting of the input average function (see Section 5.1.5). The input chan-
nel number is specified with the SENS suffix. If the channel number is omitted
input channel 1 is assumed.
Example command: SENS3:AVER:DATA?
Example response: 100.0291

6.5.2 Measurement Control Commands

This group of commands deals with timing and action of the measurement pro-
cess. These commands are summarized in Table 11 on page 75.

6.5.2.1 ABORt
This command cancels the measurement or sequence of measurements in pro-
cess. If the measurement mode is continuous a new measurement will
immediatly be initiated. If the measurement mode is COUNT measuring will
stop and the measurement mode will change to OFF.
Example command: ABOR

6.5.2.2 INITiate[:IMMediate]
This command starts one measurement or a series of measurements if the
COUNT number is greater than 1. It is equivalent to selecting COUNT for the
MEASURE mode with the MEAS soft-key function in the INPUT menu. The
measurement status indication on the display is updated to reflect any changes
caused by the command. This command also sets the state of the INIT:CONT
function described below to OFF. If measuring is already in process when this
command is received no operation will occur and an “Init ignored” error (-213)
will be reported.
Example command: INIT

74
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Table 11 Measurement Control Commands

Command Action

ABORt Abort the measurement

INITiate[:IMMediate] Start a series of COUNT N measurements
INITiate:CONTinuous <Boolean> Set continuous measuring
INITiate:CONTinuous? Query continuous measuring
SENSe[n]:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value> Set the count for input averaging
SENSe[n]:AVERage:COUNt? Query the count for input averaging
SENSe[n]:AVERage[:STATe ] <Boolean> Set averaging state ON or OFF
SENSe[n]:AVERage[:STATe ]? Query averaging state
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt <numeric_value> Set number of samples for COUNT N mode
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt? Query number of samples for COUNT N mode
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value> Set measurement delay in seconds
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay? Query measurement delay
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer <numeric_value> Set sequence timer value in seconds
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer?> Query sequence timer value

6.5.2.3 INITiate:CONTinuous <Boolean>

This command starts continuous measurement if the <Boolean> parameter
value is ON or 1 or stops measurement if the <Boolean> parameter value is
OFF or 0. It is equivalent to selecting ON or OFF for the MEASURE parameter
with the MEAS soft-key function in the INPUT menu. The measurement status
indication on the display is updated to reflect any changes caused by the com-
mand. The 1560 is able to process new commands while measuring. The *RST
command sets the continuous measurement mode to OFF.
Example command: INIT:CONT ON

6.5.2.4 INITiate:CONTinuous?
This query command returns 1 if the measurement mode is continuous (MEA-
SURE: ON in the MEAS soft-key function) and returns 0 if the measurement
mode is OFF or COUNT.
Example command: INIT:CONT?
Example response: 1

6.5.2.5 SENSe:AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value>

This command sets the count for the moving average filter. It is equivalent to
setting COUNT for the AVER function in the INPUT soft-key menu. The

75
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

<numeric_value> parameter must be a number between 1 and 10. The character

values MIN (1), MAX (10), and DEF (4) are also accepted for the <nu-
meric_value> parameter. The *RST command sets the average count to the de-
fault (4).
Example command: SENS:AVER:COUN 5

6.5.2.6 SENSe:AVERage:COUNt?
This query command returns the count number for input averaging. The charac-
ter values MIN, MAX, and DEF can be appended to the command to read the
corresponding limits and default.
Example command: SENS:AVER:COUN?
Example response: 4

6.5.2.7 SENSe:AVERage[:STATe] <Boolean>

This command disables or enables averaging. It is equivalent to setting the AV-
ERAGE option in the AVER function in the INPUT soft-key menu. A
<Boolean> parameter value of 1 or ON enables averaging and 0 or OFF dis-
ables it. The *RST command sets averaging to OFF.
Example command: SENS:AVER:STAT ON

6.5.2.8 SENSe: AVERage[:STATe]?

This query command returns 1 if input averaging is ON and 0 if it is OFF.
Example command: SENS:AVER:STAT?
Example response: 0

6.5.2.9 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt <numeric_value>

This command sets the number of measurements that are acquired when mea-
surement is initiated with the INIT command. It is equivalent to setting the
COUNT N value with the MEAS soft-key function in the INPUT menu. The
<numeric_value> parameter value has the range 1 to 32767. The command also
acceps the words MIN (1), MAX (32767), and DEF (1) for the <nu-
meric_value> parameter. The *RST command sets this value to 1.
Example command: TRIG:COUN 30

6.5.2.10 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:COUNt?
This query command returns the measurement COUNT N value. The words
MIN, MAX, and DEF can also be appended to the command to read the corre-
sponding limits and default.
Example command: TRIG:COUN?
Example response: 1

76
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.2.11 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <numeric_value>

This command sets the minimum time period between measurements. It is
equivalent to setting the DELAY value with the MEAS soft-key function in the
INPUT menu. The <numeric_value> parameter value has the range 0 to 32767.
The command also acceps the words MIN (0), MAX (32767), and DEF (0) for
the <numeric_value> parameter. The *RST command sets this value to 0.
Example command: TRIG:DEL 10

6.5.2.12 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
This query command returns the measurement DELAY period.
Example command: TRIG:DEL?
Example response: 0

6.5.2.13 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer <numeric_value>

This command sets the scan sequence timer. It is equivalent to setting the SEQ
TIMER parameter with the MEAS soft-key Function in the INPUT menu. The
<numeric_value> has the range 0 to 10000. This command also accepts the
words MIN (0), MAX (10000), and DEF (0) for the <numeric_value>.

6.5.2.14 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer?
This query command returns the value of the scan sequence timer. The words
MIN, MAX, or DEF can also be appended to the command to read the corre-
sponding limits and default.

6.5.3 Input Channel Commands

77
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

This group of commands deals with the selection of input channels. These
commands are summarized in Table 12.

Table 12 Input Channel Commands

Command Action
ROUTe:CLOSe <channel> Select the primary channel
ROUTe:CLOSe:STATe? Query the current channel number being measured
ROUTe:PRIMary? Query primary channel number
ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate <Boolean> Set the scan/primary channel alternate mode
ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate? Query the alternate mode
ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST] <channel_list> Select channels for scanning
ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST]? Query scanning channels
ROUTe:SCAN:STATe <Boolean> Enable or disable scanning
ROUTe:SCAN:STATe? Query scanning

6.5.3.1 ROUTe:CLOSe <channel>

This command selects the primary input channel. It is equivalent to setting the
primary channel using the PRIM CHAN soft-key function in the INPUT
menu. The <channel> parameter specifies the channel number. The channel
number is preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. This command also sets
the scan state to OFF (see Section 6.5.3.8) and the scanning alternate state to
OFF (see Section 6.5.3.4). It does not affect the measure mode or INITiate
state. The *RST command sets the primary channel to channel 1.
Example command: ROUT:CLOS (@3)

6.5.3.2 ROUTe:CLOSe:STATe?
This query command returns the number of the current input channel.
Example command: ROUT:CLOS:STAT?
Example response: 3

6.5.3.3 ROUTe:PRIMary?
This query command returns the number of the primary channel.
Example command: ROUT:PRIM?
Example response: 1

78
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.3.4 ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate <Boolean>

This command sets the scan alternate mode. It is equivalent to selecting be-
tween the PRIM CHAN and SCAN/PRIM options with the SCAN MODE
function in the INPUT soft-key menu. A <Boolean> parameter value of 1 or
ON enables scanning and selects the alternate scan mode where the primary
channel is measured between each channel in the scan list. If the scan state (see
Section 6.5.3.8 ) was previously off it will be set on. A value of 0 or OFF sets
the scan state and scan alternate state off so that only the primary channel is
measured. The *RST command sets this to OFF.
Example command:ROUT:SCAN:ALT ON

6.5.3.5 ROUTe:SCAN:ALTernate?
This query command returns 1 if the alternate scan mode is ON and 0
otherwise.
Example command: ROUT:SCAN:ALT?
Example response: 0

6.5.3.6 ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST] <channel_list>

This command selects input channels for scanning. It is equivalent to selecting
scan channels using the SCAN CHAN soft-key function in the INPUT menu.
This command also sets the scanning state to ON (see Section 6.5.3.8 ) and the
scanning alternate state to OFF (see Section 6.5.3.4 ). It does not affect the
measure mode or INITiate state. The *RST command sets the scan channel list
to all channels selected.
The <channel_list> parameter specifies a list of channels to scan. The channel
list is preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. Channel numbers are sepa-
rated by commas. A range can be specified using a colon between two channel
numbers. For example, if you want to select channels 1, 3, 7, and 10 through 15
the list may appear as the (@1,3,7,10:15). If any channel number is greater than
the actual number of channels it will be ignored. Channel numbers may appear
in the list in any order. However, they will always be scanned from the lowest
number to the highest.
Example command: ROUT:SCAN (@2,4)

6.5.3.7 ROUTe:SCAN[:LIST]?
This query command returns the list of channels selected for scanning. The
channel list is preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. Channel numbers
are separated by commas. This command returns a list of channels selected for
scanning regardless of whether or not scanning is enabled.
Example command: ROUT:SCAN?
Example response: (@2,3,4)

79
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.3.8 ROUTe:SCAN:STATe <Boolean>

This command enables or disables input channel scanning. It is equivalent to
selecting between the PRIM CHAN and SCAN options with the SCAN
MODE function in the INPUT soft-key menu. A <Boolean> parameter value
of 1 or ON enables scanning. This also disables the alternate scan mode (see
Section 6.5.3.4 ) so that only the selected scan channels are measured. A value
of 0 or OFF disables scanning so that only the primary input channel is mea-
sured. The *RST command sets scanning to OFF.
Example command: ROUT:SCAN:STAT ON

6.5.3.9 ROUTe:SCAN:STATe?
This query command returns 1 if the scan state is ON and 0 otherwise.
Example command: ROUT:SCAN:STAT?
Example response: 0

80
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.4 Probe Commands

This group of commands deals with temperature conversion and probe charac-
terization. The commands are summarized in Table 13. None of the probe pa-
rameters are affected by the *RST command.

Table 13 Probe Command Summary

Command Action
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:CATalog? Query available conversion types
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:COPY <channel>annel Copy conversion parameters from another channel
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:DATA? Query output of conversion block
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME <convert_name> Select the conversion type
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME? Query the conversion type
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:CATalog? Query a list of conversion parameters
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue Set conversion parameter values
<parameter_name>,<numeric_value>
(;<parameter_name>,<numeric_value>...)
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? Query the value of a conversion parameter
<parameter_name>
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? ALL Query the values of all conversion parameters
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber <serial_number> Set the probe serial number
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber? Query the probe serial number
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow Select a low ITS-90 sub-range
<sub-range_number>
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow? Query the low ITS-90 sub-range
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh Select a high ITS-90 sub-range
<sub-range_number>
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh? Query the high ITS-90 sub-range
CALCulate[n]:CONVert:TEST? <numeric_parame- Test the conversion calculation
ter>
(,<numeric_parameter>)

81
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.4.1 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:CATalog?
This query command returns a list of conversion types available for the given
input channel. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The re-
sponse list gives the names of the conversion types as strings (enclosed in dou-
ble quotes) separated by commas. The available conversion types depend on the
type of module to which the channel belongs. Table 14 lists the names of con-
version types available with each input module type.
Example command: CAL2:CONV:CAT?
Example response:
“I90”, ”RES”,”W”,”I68”,”CVD”,”POLY”

Table 14 Conversion Type Mnemonics

Input Type Conversion types Mnemonic

PRT/SPRT ITS-90 (default) I90
R(Ω) RES
W(T90) W
IPTS-68 I68
CVD CVD
POLYNOMIAL POLY
Thermistor THRM-R(T) (default) TRES
R(Ω) RES
THRM-T(R) TTEM
POLYNOMIAL POLY
2564 module ITS-90 I90
R(Ω) RES
W(T90) W
ITPS-68 I68
CVD CVD
POLYNOMIAL POLY
THRM-R(T) TRES
THRM-T(R) TTEM
Thermocouple TC-K (default) K
VOLTS VOLT
TC-B B
TC-E E
TC-J J

82
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Input Type Conversion types Mnemonic

TC-N N
TC-R R
TC-S S
TC-T T
TC-AU/PT AUPT
TABLE TABL
POLYNOMIAL POLY
Others
NONE NONE
POLYNOMIAL POLY

6.5.4.2 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:COPY <channel>

This command copies the conversion type, sub-ranges (ITS-90), serial number,
and characterization coefficients from another channel. The destination channel
number is given by the CALC suffix n. If the channel number is omitted input
channel 1 is assumed. The source channel number is given by the <channel>
parameter. If the input types of the two channels are incompatible, an “Incom-
patible type” error (-294) is generated. Copying parameters does not affect the
parameters of the source channel. The following example copies all probe pa-
rameters from input channel 1 to input channel 2.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:COPY 1

6.5.4.3 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:DATA?
This query command returns the most recent temperature measurement for the
given input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix
n.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:DATA?
Example response: 0.0113

6.5.4.4 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME <conversion_name>

This command selects the conversion type by name for the given input channel
number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The <conver-
sion_name> is a mnemonic indicating the conversion type. It should not be en-
closed in quotes. The acceptable conversion types depend on the type of
module to which the input channel belongs. Conversion types and their names
are listed in Table 14 on page 82. DEF can be used as the conversion name to
select the default conversion type.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:NAME I90

83
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 15 Conversion Parameters

Conversion name Parameters

I90, range 0 (none) RTPW
I90, low range 1 RTPW, A1, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5
I90, low range 2 RTPW, A2, B2, C1, C2, C3
I90, low range 3 RTPW, A3, B3, C1
I90, low range 4 RTPW, A4, B4
I90, low range 5 RTPW, A5, B5
I90, high range 6 RTPW, A6, B6, C6, D
I90, high range 7 RTPW, A7, B7, C7
I90, high range 8 RTPW, A8, B8
I90, high range 9 RTPW, A9, B9
I90, high range 10 RTPW, A10
I90, high range 11 RTPW, A11
W RTPW
I68 R0, ALPH, DELT, A4, C4
CVD R0, ALPH, DELT, BETA
POLY A0, A1, ...A10
TRES B0, B1, B2, B3
TTEM A0, A1, A2, A3
POLY A0, A1, ...A10
K CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
B CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
E CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
J CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
N CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
R CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3, DC1, DC2
S CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3, DC1, DC2
T CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3
AUPT CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, ADJ1, T2, ADJ2, T3, ADJ3, DC1, DC2
TABL CJC, CJCT, POIN, T1, V1, T2, V2, ...T10, V10
POLY CJC, CJCT, C0, C1, ...C15
POLY A0, A1, ...A10

84
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.4.5 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:NAME?
This query command returns the name of the selected conversion type for the
given input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix
n. Conversion types and their names are listed in Table 14. The returned name
is not enclosed in quotes.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:NAME?
Example response: I90

6.5.4.6 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:CATalog?
This query command returns the names of probe characterization parameters
used with the selected conversion type for the given input channel number. The
channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The response list gives the
names of the characterization parameters as strings (enclosed in double quotes)
separated by commas. If no parameters are available with the selected conver-
sion type, an empty string, “”, is returned. The list of parameters depends on
the selected conversion type. Characterization parameters for the various con-
version types are listed in Table 3 on page 34. For the ITS-90 conversion, the
list also depends on the selected sub-ranges (see Section 6.5.4.12 and 6.5.4.14).
Example command: CALC2:CONV:PAR:CAT?
Example response: “A4”,”B4”,”A7”,”B7”,”C7”

6.5.4.7 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue <parameter_name>, <nu-

meric_value>[,<parameter_name>,<numeric_value> . . . ]
This command sets the values of one or more conversion parameters for the
given input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix
n. The <parameter_name> is the name of a parameter (see Table 15). It should
not be enclosed in quotes. If the given parameter name is not acceptable with
the selected conversion type, a “Settings conflict” error (-221) is generated. The
<numeric_value> is the desired value of the parameter. DEF is also accepted to
set a parameter to its default value. For the CJC parameter, possible values are
0 for internal and 1 for external. Multiple parameters can be set with one com-
mand using a comma to separate the parameter names. The order of parameters
is not important but the value must always immediately follow the parameter
name.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:PAR:VAL
RTPW,100.0145,A8,-3.2878E-4,B8,-1.894E-5

6.5.4.8 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? <parameter_name>

This query command returns the value of the specified conversion parameter
for the given input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC
suffix n. The <parameter_name> is the name of the parameter as given in Table
15. It should not be enclosed in quotes. If the given parameter name is not ac-

85
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

ceptable with the selected conversion type, a “Settings conflict” error (-221) is
generated.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:PAR:VAL? RTPW
Example response: 100.0145

6.5.4.9 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:PARameter:VALue? ALL

This query command returns the values of all conversion parameters for the
given input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix
n. Returned values are preceded by the parameter name and a separating
comma. Parameter names are presented as strings (enclosed in quotes). If there
are no parameters for the given channel, an empty string, “”, is returned.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:PAR:VAL? ALL
Example response: “RTPW”,100.0145,”A8”,
–3.2878E-4,”B8”,–1.894E-5

6.5.4.10 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber <serial_number>

This command sets the probe serial number for the given input channel number.
The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The <serial_number> pa-
rameter is a string (enclosed in quotes) representing the serial number of the
probe. It can consist of up to eight characters that includes any letters, numeric
digits, decimal points, and minus signs.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SNUM “4-336C”

6.5.4.11 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SNUMber?
This query command returns the probe serial number for the given input chan-
nel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The returned
serial number is in string format (enclosed in quotes).
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SNUM?
Example response: “4-336C”

6.5.4.12 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow <sub-range_number>

This command selects one of the ITS-90 low sub-ranges for the given input
channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The
<sub-range_number> is 0 through 5. 0 sets the sub-range to NONE. If the
ITS-90 conversion is not selected for the given channel number, a “Settings
conflict” error (-221) is generated.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SRLOW 4

6.5.4.13 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRLow?
This query command returns the selected ITS-90 low sub-range for the given
input channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The

86
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

returned sub-range is a number from 0 to 5. If the ITS-90 conversion is not se-

lected for the given channel number, a “Settings conflict” error (-221) is
generated.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SRLOW?
Example response: 4

6.5.4.14 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh <sub-range_number>

This command selects one of the ITS-90 high sub-ranges for the given input
channel number. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The
<sub-range_number> is 0 or 6 through 11. 0 sets the sub-range to NONE. If the
ITS-90 conversion is not selected for the given channel number, a “Setting con-
flict” error (-221) is generated.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SRH 7

6.5.4.15 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:SRHigh?
This query command returns the selected ITS-90 low sub-range for the given
input channel. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The re-
turned sub-range is 0 or 6 through 11. If the ITS-90 conversion is not selected
for the given channel number, a “Setting conflict” error (-221) is generated.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:SRH?
Example response: 7

6.5.4.16 CALCulate[n]:CONVert:TEST? <numeric_value>[,<numeric_value>]

This query command is used to test the temperature conversion for the given in-
put channel number. It returns the temperature corresponding to the given resis-
tance or voltage. Temperature is calculated using the selected system
temperature units. The channel number is given by the CALC suffix n. The re-
sistance or voltage is specified using the first <numeric_value> parameter. The
second <numeric_value> parameter can be used to specify a CJC temperature
for thermocouple conversions. It is ignored if internal CJC is specified. If it is
omitted when external CJC is specified, a value of 0 is assumed.
Example command: CALC2:CONV:TEST? 100.0145
Example response: 0.0100

6.5.5 Output Channel Commands

87
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

This group of commands controls the output of data to output channels. They
are summarized in Table 16.

Table 16 Output Channel Commands

Command Action
OUTPut[n]:CALC <numeric_value> Select calculation type for an output channel
OUTPut[n]:CALC? Query calculation type for an output channel
OUTPut[n]:NCHannel <channel> Select negative input channel for an output channel
OUTPut[n]:NCHannel? Query negative input channel for an output channel
OUTPut[n]:PCHannel <channel> Select positive input channel for an output channel
OUTPut[n]:PCHannel? Query positive input channel for an output channel
OUTPut[n][:STATe] <Boolean> Enable or disable output channel
OUTPut[n][:STATe]? Query state of output channel

6.5.5.1 OUTPut[n]:CALC <numeric_value>

This command selects the calculation type for which results are output to a
given output channel. It is equivalent to setting CALCULATION with the
OUTPUT CHAN soft-key function (see Section 5.3.2 ). The output channel
number is given by the OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted output channel 1 is as-
sumed. The command SYST:CONF:OCH? (Section 6.5.8.12) can be used to
determine the number of installed output channels. The <numeric_value> spec-
ifies the calculation type according to Table 17. The *RST command sets the
calculation type to 0 (temperature) for all output channels.
Example command: OUTP1:CALC 0

6.5.5.2 OUTPut[n]:CALC?
This query command returns the calculation type for a given output channel.
The output channel number is given by the OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted out-
put channel 1 is assumed. The response is a number showing the calculation
type (see Table 17).
Example command: OUTP1:CALC?

88
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Example response:0

Table 17 Output Calculation Types

Number Type
0 temperature
1 average
2 standard deviation
3 minimum
4 maximum
5 spread
6 n
7 input

6.5.5.3 OUTPut[n]:NCHannel <channel>

This command selects the input channel routed to the negative path of the out-
put channel. It is equivalent to setting -CHANNEL with the OUTPUT CHAN
soft-key function (see Section 5.3.2). The output channel number is given by
the OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted output channel 1 is assumed. The input chan-
nel number is given by the <channel> parameter. The channel number is pre-
ceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. For example, (@2) would be used to
select input channel 2. Use (@) to specify no input channel. This command
also sets the OUTPut:STATe to ON (see Section 6.5.5.7). The *RST command
sets the negative channel to none for all output channels.
Example command: OUTP1:NCH (@2)

6.5.5.4 OUTPut[n]:NCHannel?
This query command returns the input channel routed to the negative path of
the output channel. The output channel number is given by the OUTP suffix n.
If it is omitted output channel 1 is assumed. The returned channel number is
preceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. If no channel is selected (@) is
returned.
Example command: OUTP1:NCH?
Example response: (@2)

6.5.5.5 OUTPut[n]:PCHannel <channel>

This command selects the input channel routed to the positive path of the out-
put channel. It is equivalent to setting +CHANNEL with the OUTPUT CHAN
menu function (see Section 5.3.2). The output channel number is given by the
OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted output channel 1 is assumed. The input channel
number is given by the <channel> parameter. The channel number is preceded
by @ and enclosed in parentheses. For example, (@2) would be used to select

89
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

input channel 2. Use (@) to specify no input channel. This command also sets
the OUTPut:STATe to ON (see Section 6.5.5.7). The *RST command sets the
positive channel to none for all output channels.
Example command: OUTP1:PCH (@1)

6.5.5.6 OUTPut[n]:PCHannel?
This query command returns the input channel routed to the positive path of the
output channel. The output channel number is given by the OUTP suffix n. If it
is omitted output channel 1 is assumed. The returned channel number is pre-
ceded by @ and enclosed in parentheses. If no channel is selected (@) is
returned.
Example command: OUTP1:PCH?
Example response: (@1)

6.5.5.7 OUTPut[n][:STATe] <Boolean>

This command enables or disables output to the given output channel. The out-
put channel number is given by the OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted output chan-
nel 1 is assumed. Giving a <Boolean> parameter value of OFF or 0 sets both
+CHANNEL and –CHANNEL to none or 0. Giving a <Boolean> parameter
value of ON or 1 sets the +CHANNEL to the primary input channel and
–CHANNEL to none or 0. The *RST command sets all output channels OFF.
Example command: OUTP1 OFF

6.5.5.8 OUTPut[n][:STATe]?
This query command returns the state of the given output channel. The output
channel number is given by the OUTP suffix n. If it is omitted output channel 1
is assumed. The response is 1 if output to the channel is enabled (either
+CHANNEL or –CHANNEL is set) or 0 if disabled.
Example command: OUTP1?
Example response: 0

90
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.6 Printer Commands

This group of commands controls output to printer devices.

Table 18 Printer Commands

Command Action
HCOPy:ABORt Cancel printing of memory data
HCOPy[:IMMediate] <printer_number>, Print data in memory to printer device
<numeric_value>
HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe] <Boolean> Enable or disable data output to printer
HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe?] Query printer output state

6.5.6.1 HCOPy:ABORt
This command cancels the printing of memory data initiated with the
HCOP:IMM command.
Example command: HCOP:ABOR

6.5.6.2 HCOPy[:IMMediate] <printer_number>,<numeric_value>

This command initiates printing of memory data to the given printer device.
This is equivalent to using the PRINT MEMORY menu function (see Section
5.3.4). The printer device number is given by <printer_number>. Printer device
1 is the serial port on the base. Other printer devices are assigned numbers se-
quentially. The command SYST:CONF: PDEV? (Section 6.5.8.16 ) can be used
to determine the number of installed printer devices. The number of measure-
ments to print is specified with <numeric_value>. MAX can be used to print all
data. If the given number is larger than the number of measurements stored in
memeory a ”Data out of range” error (-222) is reported. The number of avail-
able measurements can be determined using the DATA:POIN? command (Sec-
tion 6.5.1.9). Printing can be canceled with the HCOPy:ABOR command (see
above). Measurements are printed one measurement per line with the channel
number, measurement value, unit, time, and date. Use the appropriate commu-
nication commands (Section 6.5.7) or device setup commands (Section
6.5.8.20) to configure printer port options such as baud rate or linefeed enable.
The following example prints the 10 most recent measurements stored in mem-
ory to the base serial port.
Example command: HCOP 1,10

6.5.6.3 HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe] <Boolean>

This command enables or disables output of measurement data to printer de-
vices. This is equivalent to using the PRINT OUTPUT menu function (see
Section 5.3.3). When printing is enabled all measurement data are printed as
they are acquired. The printer device number is given by the PRIN suffix n. If it
is omitted printer port 1, the base serial port, is assumed. Printer devices are as-

91
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

signed numbers sequentially starting with 1 for the base serial port. The com-
mand SYST:CONF:PDEV? (Section 6.5.8.16) can be used to query the number
of installed printer devices. Giving a <Boolean> parameter value of ON or 1
enables printing and OFF or 0 disables printing. Measurements are printed one
measurement per line with the channel number, measurement value, unit, time,
and date. Use the appropriate communication commands (Section 6.5.7) or de-
vice setup commands (Section 6.5.8.20) to configure printer port options such
as baud rate or linefeed enable. The *RST command sets all printer devices
OFF.
Example command: HCOP:PRIN ON

6.5.6.4 HCOPy:PRINter[n][:STATe]?
This query command returns the state of the given printer device. The printer
device number is given by the PRIN suffix n. If it is omitted printer port 1, the
base serial port, is assumed. The response is 1 if printing to the device is en-
abled or 0 if disabled.
Example command: HCOP:PRIN?
Example response: 1

6.5.7 Communication Interface Commands

This group of commands (Table 19) controls the base serial port configuration
options. Configuration of add-on communication ports is done using the
SYST:MOD:DEV:WRIT command as explained in Section 6.5.8.20.

6.5.7.1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD <numeric_value>

This command sets the baud rate of the base serial port. The <numeric_value>
parameter specifies the desired baud rate. The nearest possible baud rate will be
selected. The baud rate is not affected by the *RST command.
Example command: SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 2400

6.5.7.2 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD?
This query command returns the baud rate of the base serial port.
Example command: SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD?
Example response: 2400

6.5.7.3 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUPlex <Boolean>

This command sets the duplex or echo mode of the base serial port. The
<Boolean> parameter turns on or off full duplex. A value of 1 or ON turns full
duplex on and 0 or OFF turns it off. If full duplex is ON, all characters received
will be echoed back. Duplex is not affected by the *RST command.
Example command: SYST:COMM:SER:FDUP OFF

92
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.7.4 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUP?
This query command returns the duplex or echo mode of the base serial port.
This command returns 1 if full duplex is on and 0 otherwise.

Table 19 Communication Interface Commands

Command Action
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD Set the baud rate for the base serial port
<numeric_value>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:BAUD? Query the baud rate for the base serial port
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUPlex Select duplex (echo) mode for the base serial port
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:FDUP? Query duplex (echo) mode for the base serial port
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed Enable or disable linefeed for the base serial port
<Boolean>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed? Query linefeed for the base serial port

Example command: SYST:COMM:SER:FDUP?

Example response: 0

6.5.7.5 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed <Boolean>

This command enables or disables linefeed for the base serial port. A
<Boolean> value of 1 or ON turns the linefeed on and 0 or OFF turns it off. If
the linefeed is ON, a linefeed character (ASCII decimal 10) will be appended to
the carriage return at the end of each line during transmission. Linefeed is not
affected by the *RST command.
Example command:SYST: COMM:SER:LIN ON

6.5.7.6 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[:RECeive]:LINefeed?
This query command returns the state of the linefeed for the base serial port. It
returns 1 if the linefeed is on and 0 otherwise.
Example command: SYST:COMM:SER:LIN?
Example response: 1

93
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.8 Module Commands

This group of commands (Table 20) can be used to determine the module con-
figuration and to communicate directly with module devices.

Table 20 Module Commands

Command Action
SYSTem:CONFigure:CDEVice? Query number of communication devices
SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:DADDress? Query device address of communication device
SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:MADDress? Query module address of communication device
SYSTem:CONFigure:ICHannel? Query number of input channels
SYSTem:CONFigure:IDEVice? Query number of input devices
SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:DADDress? Query device address of input device
SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:MADDress? Query module address of input device
SYSTem:CONFigure:MNUMber? Query number of modules
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DEVice[n] Query device information
:INFormation?
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DNUMber? Query number of devices in module
SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:INFormation? Query module information
SYSTem:CONFigure:OCHannel? Query number of output channels
SYSTem:CONFigure:ODEVice? Query number of output devices
SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:DADDress? Query device address of output device
SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:MADDress? Query module address of output device
SYSTem:CONFigure:PDEVice? Query number of printer devices
SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:DADDress? Query device address of printer device
SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:MADDress? Query module address of printer device
SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:READ? nd Read data from a module device
SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:WRITe nd[,rameter] Write data to a module device

6.5.8.1 SYSTem:CONFigure:CDEVice?
This query command returns the number of installed communication devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:CDEV?
Example response: 3

6.5.8.2 SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:DADDress?
This query command returns the device address (number of the device within
its module) of a given communication device. The communication device num-
ber is given by the COMM suffix n. Communication devices are assigned num-
bers sequentially starting with 1 for the base serial port. The command

94
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

SYST:CONF:CDEV? can be used to determine the number of installed com-

munication devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:COMM3:DADD?
Example response: 2

6.5.8.3 SYSTem:CONFigure:COMMunicate[n]:MADDress?
This query command returns the module number or address of the module that
contains a given communication device. The communication device number is
given by the COMM suffix n. Communication devices are assigned numbers
sequentially starting with 1 for the base serial port. The command
SYST:CONF:CDEV? can be used to query the number of installed communi-
cation devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:COMM3:MADD?
Example response:3

6.5.8.4 SYSTem:CONFigure:ICHannel?
This query command returns the total number of installed input channels.
Example command:SYST:CONF:ICH?
Example response:10

6.5.8.5 SYSTem:CONFigure:IDEVice?
This query command returns the number of installed input devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:IDEV?
Example response: 2

6.5.8.6 SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:DADDress?
This query command returns the device address (number of the device within
its module) of a given input device. The input device number is given by the
INP suffix n. Input devices are assigned numbers sequentially starting with 1.
The command SYST:CONF:IDEV? (Section 6.5.8.5) can be used to determine
the number of installed input devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:INP2:DADD?
Example response: 1

6.5.8.7 SYSTem:CONFigure:INPut[n]:MADDress?
This query command returns the number of the module that contains a given in-
put device. The input device number is given by the INP suffix n. Input devices
are assigned numbers sequentially starting with 1. The command
SYST:CONF:IDEV? (Section 6.5.8.5) can be used to determine the number of
installed input devices.

95
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Example command: SYST:CONF:INP2:MADD?

Example response: 2

6.5.8.8 SYSTem:CONFigure:MNUMber?
This query command returns the number of installed modules.
Example command: SYST:CONF:MNUM?
Example response: 3

6.5.8.9 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:INFormation?
This query command returns information about a given device. The device is
specified by module number and device number. The module and device num-
bers are given by the MOD suffix and DEV suffix respectively. The command
SYST:CONF:MNUM? (Section 6.5.8.8) can be used to query the number of in-
stalled modules and the command SYST:CONF:MOD[n]:DNUM? (Section
6.5.8.10) can be used to determine the number of devices within a module.
The format of the response is as follows:
<name>,<class>,<channels>
The <name> parameter is a string, enclosed in quotes, showing the name of the
device. The <class> parameter is a character mnemonic (without quotes) show-
ing the class of the module. This is either INP for input, OUTP for data output,
PRIN for printer output, or COMM for communication. The <channels> pa-
rameter is a numeric value showing the number of channels in the device.
Example command: SYST:CONF:MOD1:DEV1:INF?
Example response:”SPRT”,INP,2

6.5.8.10 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:DNUMber?
This query command returns the number of devices in a given module. The
module number is given by the MOD suffix n. The command
SYST:CONF:MNUM? (Section 6.5.8.8) can be used to determine the number
of installed modules.
Example command: SYST:CONF:MOD3:DNUM?
Example response: 5

6.5.8.11 SYSTem:CONFigure:MODule[n]:INFormation?
This query command returns information about a given module. The module
number is given by the MOD suffix n. The command SYST:CONF:MNUM?
(Section 6.5.8.8) can be used to determine the number of installed modules.
The format of the response is as follows:
<name>,<devices>,<model number>,
<serial_number>,<firmware version>

96
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

The <name> parameter is a string, enclosed in quotes, showing the name of the
module. The <devices> parameter is a numeric value showing the number of
devices in the module. The <model number> parameter is a character value
(without quotes) showing the model number of the module. The <serial num-
ber> parameter is a character value (without quotes) showing the serial number
of the module. If the serial number is not available 0 is returned. The <firmware
version> is a numeric value of the form v.vv showing the firmware version
number for the module.
Example command: SYST:CONF:MOD1:INF?
Example response: ”SPRT”,1,2560,A26123,1.12

6.5.8.12 SYSTem:CONFigure:OCHannel?
This query command returns the total number of installed output channels.
Example command: SYST:CONF:OCH?
Example response: 1

6.5.8.13 SYSTem:CONFigure:ODEVice?
This query command returns the number of installed output devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:ODEV?
Example response: 1

6.5.8.14 SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:DADDress?
This query command returns the device address (number of the device within
its module) of a given output device. The output device number is given by the
OUTP suffix n. Output devices are assigned numbers sequentially starting with
1. The command SYST:CONF:ODEV? (Section 6.5.8.13) can be used to deter-
mine the number of installed output devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:OUTP1:DADD?
Example response: 5

6.5.8.15 SYSTem:CONFigure:OUTPut[n]:MADDress?
This query command returns the module number or address of the module that
contains a given output device. The output device number is given by the
OUTP suffix n. Output devices are assigned numbers sequentially starting with
1. The command SYST:CONF:ODEV? (Section 6.5.8.13) can be used to deter-
mine the number of installed output devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:OUTP1:MADD?
Example response: 3

6.5.8.16 SYSTem:CONFigure:PDEVice?
This query command returns the number of installed printer devices.

97
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Example command: SYST:CONF:PDEV?

Example response: 1

6.5.8.17 SYSTem:CONFigure:PRINter[n]:DADDress?
This query command returns the device address (number of the device within
its module) of a given printer device. The printer device number is given by the
PRIN suffix n. Printer devices are assigned numbers sequentially starting with
1. The command SYST:CONF:PDEV? (Section 6.5.8.16) can be used to deter-
mine the number of installed printer devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:PRIN1:DADD?
Example response: 4

6.5.8.18 SYSTem:CONFigure: PRINter[n]:MADDress?

This query command returns the module number or address of the module that
contains a given printer device. The printer device number is given by the PRIN
suffix n. Printer devices are assigned numbers sequentially starting with 1. The
command SYST:CONF:PDEV? (Section 6.5.8.16) can be used to determine the
number of installed printer devices.
Example command: SYST:CONF:PRIN1:MADD?
Example response: 3

6.5.8.19 SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:READ? <device_command>

This query command is used to read configuration parameters directly from a
device. The device is specified by module number and device number. The
module and device numbers are given by the MOD suffix and DEV suffix re-
spectively. The command SYST:CONF:MNUM? (Section 6.5.8.8) can be used
to determine the number of installed modules and the command
SYST:CONF:MOD[n]:DNUM? (Section 6.5.8.10) can be used to determine the
number of devices within a module. The <device_command> parameter is the
command string (enclosed in quotes) passed to the device. Each device has a
unique set of commands (refer to the operating instructions for a specific mod-
ule for a list of its device commands). The response type can be either a nu-
meric value or character data depending on the device command.
Example command: SYST:MOD2:DEV1:READ? “CURR”
Example response:10

6.5.8.20 SYSTem:MODule[n]:DEVice[n]:WRITe <device_command>,<value>

This command can be used to directly send a command to a device to set a con-
figuration parameter. The device is specified by module number and device
number. The module and device numbers are given by the MOD suffix and
DEV suffix respectively. The command SYST:CONF:MNUM? (Section
6.5.8.8) can be used to determine the number of installed modules and the com-
mand SYST:CONF: MOD[n]:DNUM? (Section 6.5.8.10) can be used to deter-

98
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

mine the number of devices within a module. The <device_command> is the

command string (enclosed in quotes) passed to the device. Each device has a
unique set of commands (refer to the operating instructions for a specific mod-
ule for a list of its device commands). The <value> parameter, numeric or char-
acter data depending on the command, may be used to set a parameter. The
*RST command does not affect any device configuration parameters.
Example command: SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRITE “CURR”,10

6.5.9 System Commands

This group of commands deals with the general system configuration. The
commands are summarized in Table 21.

Table 21 System Commands

Command Action
*IDN? Query instrument identification
*OPT? Return model numbers of installed modules
*RST System reset
SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day> Set the date
SYSTem:DATE? Query the date
SYSTem:SNUMber <serial_number> Set the system serial number
SYSTem:SNUMber? Query the system serial number
SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second> Set the time
SYSTem:TIME? Query the time
SYSTem:VERSion? Query SCPI implementation version number
UNIT:TEMPerature <unit> Set the temperature unit
UNIT:TEMPerature? Query the current temperature unit setting

6.5.9.1 *IDN?
This query command returns the instrument identification string that indicates
the manufacturer, model number, serial number, and firmware version. The se-
rial number can be set with the SYST:SNUM command (Section 6.5.9.6). If the
serial number is not available 0 is returned. The format of the response is as
follows:
HART,1560,<serial_number>,<v.vv>
Example command:*IDN?
Example response:HART,1560,641022,1.11

99
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.9.2 *OPT?
This query command returns a list of installed modules. Modules are reported
by position, front to back for the eight positions. The module model number is
reported if a module is installed or 0 is returned otherwise. Numbers are sepa-
rated by commas. For example, if the 1560 is equipped with one 2560 SPRT
module in front and two 2566 Thermocouple Scanner modules, the following
example would have the given response.
Example command: *OPT?
Example response: 2560,2566,2566,0,0,0,0,0

6.5.9.3 *RST
This command sets the instrument operating parameters to defined conditions.
It is equivalent to using the SYSTEM RESET function in the SYSTEM
soft-key menu. It has the following effects:
• Sets the measure mode to off.
• Sets the COUNT N number to 1.
• Sets the measurement delay to 0.
• Sets the primary channel to input channel 1.
• Sets the scan channel list to include all channels.
• Sets the scan mode to primary channel.
• Sets input average to off.
• Disables routing to all output channels by setting the positive input chan-
nel number to 0, the negative input channel number to 0, and the calcula-
tion type to temperature.
• Sets printing to all printer interface devices to off.
• Clears the statistical functions.
• Sets units to C.
This command does not affect probe parameters and characterization coeffi-
cients, display setup, time, password options, module device setup or calibra-
tion parameters, or communications status registers.
Example command: *RST

6.5.9.4 SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>

This command sets the date. It is equivalent to setting the date using the TIME
function in the SYSTEM soft-key menu. The <year> parameter is a four-digit
number. The <month> parameter is a one or two-digit number from 1 to 12.
The <day> parameter is a one or two-digit number from 1 to 31.
Example command: SYST:DATE 1996,5,23

100
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.9.5 SYSTem:DATE?
This query command returns the date. The response is in the format
<year>,<month>, <day>.
Example command: SYST:DATE?
Example response: 1996,5,23

6.5.9.6 SYSTem:SNUMber <serial_number>

This command sets the instrument’s serial number. This serial number appears
in the serial number field of the identification queried with the *IDN? com-
mand (Section 6.5.9.1). The serial number may include any digits and letters
from one to ten characters. The default serial number is 0. The *RST command
has no affect on the serial number.
Example command: SYST:SNUM 641022

6.5.9.7 SYSTem:SNUMber?
This query command returns the instrument serial number. If no serial number
has been set 0 is returned.
Example command: SYST:SNUM?
Example response: 641022

6.5.9.8 SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>

This command sets the time. It is equivalent to setting the time using the TIME
function in the SYSTEM soft-key menu. The <hour> parameter is a one or
two-digit number, from 0 to 23, for the hour in 24-hour mode, e.g. 23 for 11:00
p.m. The <minute> parameter is a one or two-digit number, from 0 to 59, for
the minute. The <second> parameter is a one or two-digit number, from 0 to
60, for the second.
Example command: SYST:TIME 11,43,23

6.5.9.9 SYSTem:TIME?
This query command returns the time. The response is in the format
<hour>,<minute>, <second>.
Example command: SYST:TIME?
Example response: 11,43,23

6.5.9.10 SYSTem:VERSion?
This command returns the SCPI version number.
Example command: SYST:VERS?
Example response: 1994.0

101
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.9.11 UNIT:TEMPerature <unit>

This command sets the system temperature units. It is equivalent to setting the
units using the UNITS function in the SYSTEM soft-key menu. The <unit>
parameter is either C or CEL for Celsius, F or FAR for Fahrenheit, or K for
Kelvin. The *RST command sets the units to Celsius.
Example command: UNIT:TEMP C

6.5.9.12 UNIT:TEMPerature?
This query command returns the system temperature unit. The response is ei-
ther CEL for Celsius, FAR for Fahrenheit, or K for Kelvin.
Example command: UNIT:TEMP?
Example response: CEL

6.5.10 Status Commands

This group includes commands to report the status and conditions of the instru-
ment. The commands are summarized in Table 22 on page 104. None of the
status registers and queues are directly affected by the *RST command.

6.5.10.1 *CLS
This command clears the status registers. It clears the Event Status Register,
Operation Status Event Register, Questionable Status Event Register, and sys-
tem error queue. The Status Byte Register is updated to show that the Event
Status Register, Operation Status Condition Register, and Questionable Status
Condition Register are cleared. This command does not affect the Operation
Status Condition Register, Questionable Status Condition Register, Event Status
Enable Register, Operation Status Enable Register, Questionable Status Enable
Register, or the output (response) queue.

6.5.10.2 *ESE <numeric_value>

This command sets the Event Status Enable Register. This register determines
which event bits of the Event Status Register affect the ESB Event Sum-
mary-Message Bit of the Status Byte Register. If any event bit of the Event Sta-
tus Register is set (1) while its corresponding mask bit of the Event Status
Enable Register is set, the ESB Event Summary-Message Bit of the Status Byte
Register will be set. The value of the <numeric_value> parameter is a number
from 0 to 255 that is the sum of the binary-weighted values of each mask bit.
The Event Status Register is described in Section 6.5.10.4 below. The following
example causes the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register to be set whenever a
command error or execution error occurs.
Example command: *ESE 48

102
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

6.5.10.3 *ESE?
This query command returns the Event Status Enable Register (see 6.5.10.2
above).
Example command: *ESE?
Example response: 48

6.5.10.4 *ESR?
This query command returns the Event Status Register. It also clears the Event
Status Register and the ESB bit of the Status Byte Register. The value returned
indicates the condition of each of the eight bits of the register by adding the bi-
nary-weighted values of each bit. The meaning of each bit, when set (1) , is as
follows where 0 is the least significant and 7 is the most significant:
0 Operation complete (OPC). Execution of the last command is completed.

1 Request control (RQC). No function for this instrument.

2 Query error (QYE). An attempt has been made to read data when none is
available or pending.
3 Device dependent error (DDE). A hardware error condition occurred.
4 Execution error (EXE). An invalid parameter for a command has been
received or the command could not be executed under existing
conditions.
5 Command error (CME). An unrecognized command or a command with
improper syntax has been received.
6 User request (URQ). No function for this instrument.
7 Power on (PON). Always set after the power is switched on.
The ESB bit of the Status Byte Register (Section 6.5.10.9) is set (1) whenever
any bit of the Event Status Register is set and its corresponding mask bit in the
Event Status Enable Register (Section 6.5.10.3) is set. The Event Status Regis-
ter is cleared when queried with the ESR? command or when the *CLS com-
mand is received. The response in the following example would be given after
an invalid command is received by the 1560 and no other error occurred.
Example command: *ESR?
Example response: 32

6.5.10.5 *OPC
This command causes the Operation Complete (OPC) event bit in the Event
Status Register to be set as soon as all pending command operations are com-
pleted. Since all commands are sequential for this instrument this command is
unnecessary.

103
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 22 Status Commands

Command Action
*CLS Clear status
*ESE <numeric_value> Set Standard Event Status Enable Register
*ESE? Query Standard Event Status Enable Register
*ESR? Query Standard Event Status Register
*OPC Enable Operation Complete message
*OPC? Query Operation Complete flag
*SRE <numeric_value> Set Service Request Enable Register
*SRE? Query Service Request Enable Register
*STB? Query Status Byte
*TST? Perform self-test and return status
*WAI Wait to continue
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Query Operation Status Condition Register
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <numeric_value> Set Operation Status Event Enable Register
STATus:OPERation:ENABle? Query Operation Status Event Enable Register
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? Query Operation Status Event Register
STATus:PRESet Set status registers to defaults
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? Query Questionable Status Condition Register
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <numeric_value> Set Questionable Status Event Enable Register
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? Query Questionable Status Event Enable Register
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? Query Questionable Status Event Register
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? Query system error message
SYSTem:ERRor? Query system error message

6.5.10.6 *OPC?
This query command returns “1” as soon as all other pending command opera-
tions are completed. Since all commands are sequential for this instrument this
command is unnecessary.

6.5.10.7 *SRE <numeric_value>

This command sets the Service Request Enable Register. This register deter-
mines which event bits of the Status Byte Register affect the MSS Master Sum-
mary Status message bit of the Status Byte Register and generate a service
request with the IEEE-488 interface. If any event bit of the Status Byte Register
is set (1) while its corresponding mask bit of the Service Request Enable Regis-
ter is set, the MSS Master Summary Status message bit of the Status Byte Reg-
ister will be set and a service request generated. The value of the
<numeric_value> parameter is a number from 0 to 255 that is the sum of the bi-
nary-weighted values of each mask bit. The Status Byte Register is described in

104
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

section 5.5.10.9 below. The following example causes the MSS bit in the Status
Byte Register to be set and a service request to be generated whenever the ESB
bit of the Status Byte Register is set.
Example command: *SRE 32

6.5.10.8 *SRE?
This query command returns the Service Request Enable Register (see Section
6.5.10.7 above).
Example command: *SRE?
Example response: 32

6.5.10.9 *STB?
This query command returns the Status Byte Register. Reading this register
does not affect it or the output queue. The value returned indicates the condi-
tion of each of the eight bits of the register by adding the binary-weighted val-
ues of each bit. The meaning of each bit, when set (1), is as follows where 0 is
the least significant and 7 is the most significant:
0 No function, always 0.
1 No function, always 0.
2 Error Bit (ERR). Indicates that an error message is in the error queue.
3 Questionable Status Bit (QSB). Indicates that a bit in the Questionable
Status Event Register is set and its corresponding mask bit in the Ques-
tionable Status Enable Register is set. It is cleared when the Questionable
Status Event Register is cleared (by reading it, Section 6.5.10.20).
4 Message Available (MAV). Indicates that data is present in the output
queue. (Applicable only for IEEE-488 service request and serial poll.)
5 Event Status Bit (ESB). Indicates that a bit in the Event Status Register is
set and its corresponding mask bit in the Event Status Enable Register is
set. It is cleared when the Event Status Register is cleared (by reading it,
Section 6.5.10.4).
6 Master Summary Status (MSS). Indicates that any other bit in the Status
Byte Register is set and its corresponding mask bit in the Service Re-
quest Enable Register is set (see Section 6.5.10.7).
7 Operation Status Bit. Indicates that a bit in the Operation Status Event
Register is set and its corresponding mask bit in the Operation Status En-
able Register is set. It is cleared when the Operation Status Event Regis-
ter is cleared (by reading it, Section 6.5.10.15).
The Status Byte Register can also be read from the IEEE-488 interface using
serial poll (see Section 14.4.5). The Status Byte Register can not be set or
cleared directly but always reflects the current state of the reported conditions.
The response in the following example would be given after an invalid com-

105
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

mand is received by the 1560 if the CME mask bit is set in the Event Status En-
able Register and the ESB mask bit is set in the Service Request Enable
Register and no other error occurred.
Example command: *STB?
Example response: 100

6.5.10.10 *TST?
The purpose of this query command is to perform a self-test and report any er-
rors that are found. The reponse is 0 if no errors are found. Currently, self-test
can only be performed on power up so this command always returns 0.

6.5.10.11 *WAI
The purpose of this command is to cause a device to wait until all pending
command operations (overlapped commands) are completed before executing
any subsequent commands. Since all commands are sequential for this instru-
ment this command is unnecessary.

6.5.10.12 STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
This query command reads the Operation Status Condition Register. Reading
this register does not affect it. The value returned indicates the condition of
each of the eight bits of the register by adding the binary-weighted values of
each bit. The meaning of each bit, when set (1), is as follows where 0 is the
least significant and 7 is the most significant:
0-3 No function, always 0.
4 Measuring. Acquisition of a new measurement is in process.
5-15No function, always 0.
The response in the following example would be given if the measure mode is
ON or COUNT.
Example command: STAT:OPER:COND?
Example response: 16

6.5.10.13 STATus:OPERation:ENABle <numeric_value>

This command sets the Operation Status Enable Register. This register deter-
mines which event bits of the Operation Status Event Register affect the Opera-
tion Status Bit (OSB, bit 7) of the Status Byte Register. If any bit in the
Operation Status Event Register is set (1) while its corresponding mask bit in
the Operation Status Enable Register is set, the Operation Status Bit in the Sta-
tus Byte Register will be set. The value of the <numeric_value> parameter is a
number from 0 to 65535 that is the sum of the binary-weighted values of each
mask bit. The Operation Status Event Register is described in Section
6.5.10.15. The following example causes the OSB bit in the Status Byte Regis-
ter to be set when a new measurement has been acquired.

106
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

Example command: STAT:OPER:ENAB 16

6.5.10.14 STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
This query command returns the Operation Status Enable Register (see
6.5.10.13 above).
Example command: STAT:OPER:ENAB?
Example response: 16

6.5.10.15 STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This query command reads the Operation Status Event Register. Bits in this
register are set whenever the corresponding bit in the Operation Status Condi-
tion Register are set. The bit remains set even if the corresponding bit in the
Operation Status Condition Register returns FALSE. The Operation Status
Event Register is cleared when it is read. It can also be cleared with the *CLS
command (see Section 6.5.10.1).
0-3 No function, always 0.
4 Measurement complete. Acquisition of a new measurement is complete.
5-15No function, always 0.
The response in the following example would be given if a new measurement
was acquired since the last time this command was issued.
Example command: STAT:OPER?
Example response: 16

6.5.10.16 STATus:PRESet
This command sets both the Operation Status Enable Register and Questionable
Status Enable Register to 0 (see Sections 6.5.10.13 and 6.5.10.18).

6.5.10.17 STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
This query command reads the Questionable Status Condition Register. Read-
ing this register does not affect it. The value returned indicates the condition of
each of the eight bits of the register by adding the binary-weighted values of
each bit. The meaning of each bit, when set (1), is as follows where 0 is the
least significant and 7 is the most significant:
0-3 No function, always 0.
4 Temperature. The last temperature measurement is out-of-range or other-
wise questionable. This is reset when a new valid measurement is
acquired.
5-15No function, always 0.

107
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

6.5.10.18 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <numeric_value>

This command sets the Questionable Status Enable Register. This register de-
termines which event bits of the Questionable Status Event Register affect the
Questionable Status Bit (QSB, bit 3) of the Status Byte Register. If any bit of
the Questionable Status Event Register is set (1) while its corresponding mask
bit of the Questionable Status Enable Register is set, the QSB bit in the Status
Byte Register will be set. The value of the <numeric_value> parameter is a
number from 0 to 65535 that is the sum of the binary-weighted values of each
mask bit. The Questionable Status Event Register is described in Section
6.5.10.20.

6.5.10.19 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
This query command returns the Questionable Status Enable Register (see
6.5.10.18 above).

6.5.10.20 STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This query command reads the Questionable Status Event Register. Reading
this register clears it. The value returned indicates the condition of each of the
eight bits of the register by adding the binary-weighted values of each bit. The
meaning of each bit, when set (1), is as follows where 0 is the least significant
and 7 is the most significant:
0-3 No function, always 0.
4 Temperature. A previous temperature measurement was out-of-range or
otherwise questionable.
5-15No function, always 0.

6.5.10.21 STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
This query command functions identically to the SYST:ERR? command (see
below).

6.5.10.22 SYSTem:ERRor?
This query command returns a system error message if any are present in the
system error queue. Each error condition produces only one error message at a
time. The error queue may contain up to two messages. Messages are reported
in the order they occur. Reading a message from the queue removes the mes-
sage so the next message can be read. If more than two errors occur before be-
ing read the second error in the queue will be “Queue overflow” and all but the
first error will be discarded. Any error will also cause the Error Bit (ERR, bit 2)
of the Status Byte Register (Section 6.5.10.9) to be set. This command returns
error messages in the following format:
<error_number>,“<error_description>”

108
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Commands

The <error_number> is a value between -32768 and 32767. If the error mes-
sage queue contains no error messages the following message is reported:
0,“No error”
Following is a list of error messages that may be reported:
0 “No error”. This message is reported when no error message is held in
the error queue.
-100“Command error”. An invalid command was received. This may be
caused by any of the following conditions:
• The command was misspelled.
• The header separator was incorrect.
• The command is not acceptable with this instrument or firmware version.
• A query command was missing the question mark.
• A required parameter was missing.
-200“Execution error”. A valid command was received but was unable to be
executed.
-213“Init ignored”. An INIT:IMM command was received while a measure-
ment was already in process.
-221“Settings conflict”. A command could not be executed because of the
current configuration or condition of the instrument, possibly because of
incompatible probe type.
-222“Data out of range”. A received parameter value was outside the valid
range or the received data type was incorrect.
-294“Incompatible type”. The CALCn:CONV: COPY command was re-
ceived but was unable to execute because the source channel and destina-
tion channel were of incompatible types.
-300“Device-specific error”. A hardware error occurred.
-315“Configuration memory lost”. The start-up self-test detected that the data
in non-volatile RAM was invalid or was cleared because the hardware
configuration had changed.
-330“Self-test failed”. The start-up self-test detected a hardware problem
such as a module bus error.
-350“Queue overflow”. This message is placed at the end of the buffer (in
place of the last message) when an error occurred while the error queue
was full.
-360“Communication error”. Transmission of a response was unsuccessful
due to output buffer overflow.
-400“Query error”. The remote device attempted to receive data from the
1560 but no data was present or pending in the output buffer.

109
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Errors numbered -100 to -199 also generate a command error (CME) in the
Event Status Register (see Section 6.5.10.4). Errors numbered -200 to -299 also
generate an execution error (EXE) in the Event Status Register. Errors num-
bered -300 to -399 also generate a device-dependent error (DDE) in the Event
Status Register. Errors numbered -400 to -499 also generate a query error
(QYE) in the Event Status Register (see Section 6.5.10.4) .

6.6 Programming Example

Following on page 111 in Figure 12 is a listing of a sample BASIC program
that can be used to operate the 1560 remotely with a computer. This program
runs with QBASIC or GWBASIC on a PC-compatible computer. The program
uses the COM2 RS-232 port of the computer. For wiring of the interface cable
refer to Figure 11 in Section 6.2. The program requires the BAUD rate of the
1560 to be set to 2400, the DUPLEX to be HALF, and the LINEFEED to be
OFF. These parameters are set using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the SER device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the serial port. Set the parame-
ters as shown.

SET UP DEVICE: SER

BAUDRATE: 2400
DUPLEX: HALF
LINEFEED: OFF

The program first resets all operating parameters of the 1560 to default settings.
Then it programs the 1560 to measure channel 1 continuously. It will periodi-
cally check the operational status register and when it finds that a new measure-
ment is available it will read the measurement and print it on the computer
screen. To exit the program press any key on the computer keyboard.

110
 6 Digital Communications Interface
Programming Example

1 ‘This example continually reads temperature from the Hart 1560.

2 ‘Connect the 1560 serial port to the COM2 port of the computer.
3 ‘Set the BAUD rate of the 1560 to 2400.
4 ‘Set DUPLEX to HALF.
5 ‘Set LINEFEED to OFF.
6‘
8 ‘open COM2 port, 2400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
9 ‘disable handshaking
10 OPEN “COM2:2400,N,8,1,CD0,DS0,CS0" FOR RANDOM AS #1
19 ‘reset all operating parameters to defaults
20 PRINT #1, “*RST”
29 ‘select channel 1
30 PRINT #1, “ROUT:CLOS (@1)”
39 ‘set to measure continuously
40 PRINT #1, “INIT:CONT ON”
49 ‘clear status registers
50 PRINT #1, “*CLS”
100 ‘main loop
110 K$=INKEY$: IF K$<>"" GOTO 500 ‘quit if any key pressed
120 GOSUB 1000 ‘read a new measurement
130 PRINT A$ ‘print to the screen
140 GOTO 100
500 ‘end program
510 CLOSE
520 END
1000 ‘SUB: read one new measurement
1010 ‘wait for new measurement complete
1020 CNT2 = 0 ‘measurement timeout counter
1030 PRINT #1, “STAT:OPER?” ‘request status
1040 GOSUB 1200 ‘read status
1050 IF VAL(A$) AND 16 THEN 1100 ‘measurement complete
1060 GOSUB 1300 ‘wait .1 sec.
1070 CNT2 = CNT2+1
1080 IF CNT2>20 THEN 1150 ELSE 1030 ‘timeout after 2 sec.
1100 ‘read new measurement
1110 PRINT #1, “FETC?” ‘request measurement
1120 GOSUB 1200 ‘read measurement
1130 RETURN
1150 PRINT “Error: Not measuring”
1160 CLOSE: END
1200 ‘SUB: read response
1210 CNT1 = 0 ‘response timeout counter
1220 IF NOT EOF(1) GOTO 1260 ‘response sent
1230 GOSUB 1300 ‘wait another .1 sec
1240 CNT1= CNT1+1
1250 IF CNT1>20 THEN 1280 ELSE 1220 ‘timeout after 2 sec.
1260 LINE INPUT #1, A$ ‘read response
1270 RETURN
1280 PRINT “Error: No response” ‘timeout
1290 CLOSE: END
1300 ‘SUB: wait for .1 second
1310 T=TIMER
1320 IF TIMER<T+.1 THEN 1320
1330 RETURN

Figure 12 Programming Example

111
 7 2560/2567 SPRT Module
Description

7 2560/2567 SPRT Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2560/2567
SPRT Module.

7.1 Description
The 2560/2567 SPRT Module is an add-on module that allows the 1560 to
measure temperature with SPRT, PRT, and RTD sensors. These modules are ca-
pable of measuring temperature with very high accuracy. The Model 2560 ac-
cepts two or four-wire sensors with nominal resistance of 25Ω or 100Ω, while
the 2567 accepts two or four-wire sensors with nominal resistance of 500Ω or
1000Ω. The modules use 1 mA excitation current to minimize sensor self-heat-
ing. The excitation current alternates polarity to minimize the effects of thermo-
electric offsets. Two sensors can be connected to the 2560/2567 simultaneously
and measured alternately.

7.2 Specifications
2560 2567
Resistance range 0 to 400 Ω 0 to 4 KΩ
Resistance accuracy, one-year1 0 to 25Ω: 0.0005Ω 0 to 250Ω: 0.00625Ω
25 to 400Ω: 20 ppm of 250 to 4KΩ: 25 ppm of
reading reading
Resistance accuracy, short-term1, 2 0 to 25Ω: 0.00025Ω 0 to 250Ω: 0.00375Ω
25 to 400Ω: 10 ppm of 250 to 4KΩ: 15 ppm of
reading reading
Temperature accuracy (typical, not includ-
ing sensor uncertainty)1
–100°C ±0.003°C ±0.004°C
0°C ±0.005°C ±0.006°C
100°C ±0.007°C ±0.009°C
200°C ±0.010°C ±0.012°C
300°C ±0.012°C ±0.015°C
400°C ±0.014°C ±0.018°C
500°C ±0.017°C ±0.021°C
600°C ±0.020°C ±0.025°C
Temperature coefficient1 0.5 ppm/°C 2.5 ppm/°C
Excitation current 1.0, 1.4mA; 1 Hz
Maximum lead resistance 100Ω
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 2
Recommended operating temperature 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
range1
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)

113
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Weight 2 lbs.
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.
2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include drift or calibration

uncertainties.

7.3 Operation
Using the 2560/2567 SPRT Module with the 1560 Black Stack is very simple.
The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using the 2560/2567
to measure with SPRTs. For instructions for installing the 2560/2567 SPRT
Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

7.3.1 Connecting a Probe

The 2560/2567 SPRT Module has ten patented DWF connectors (U.S. Patent
number 5,964,625) posts, five each for the two channels (see Figure 13). The
red terminals connect to one side of the sensor. One sources current and the
other senses the voltage. The black terminals connect to the other side of the
sensor. One sources current and the other senses the voltage. The green termi-
nal connects to ground and can be used to ground a shield wire. Two probes
can be connected to the 2560/2567 at once.
To connect two-wire probes to one channel, connect one wire to both red termi-
nals and the other wire to both black terminals. If there is a shield or guard wire
connect it to the green terminal.
To connect four-wire probes to one channel, connect the wires from one com-
mon pair (wires that are shorted together at the sensor element) to the red ter-

SPRT
MODULE
2560

Figure 13 Sensor Wiring Diagram

114
 7 2560/2567 SPRT Module
Operation

minals and the wires from the other pair to the black terminals. If there is a
shield or guard wire connect it to the green terminal.

7.3.2 Setting Coefficients

Once a PRT or SPRT probe is properly connected to the 2560/2567, the 1560
can read its resistance. To display temperature accurately, the 1560 must be
programmed with the characterization coefficients for the sensor. This is done
using the EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). The
coefficient values are normally provided with the probe on a calibration report.
Be sure to select the proper range for ITS-90 characterizations. If IEC-751
RTDs are used you may select the CVD conversion and use R0: 100, ALPHA:
0.00385, DELTA: 1.507, and BETA: 0.111.

7.3.3 Current
The 2560/2567 sources current to the sensor and measures the resulting voltage
across the sensor to determine its resistance. The current alternates every 0.5
seconds to reduce the effects of thermoelectric offsets. The normal current is
1.0 mA (2560) or 0.1 mA (2567). The current can be changed to test self-heat-
ing effects using the SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE menu (see
Section 5.4.2). Change the CURRENT parameter and press ENTER.
The SET UP DEVICE function also allows access to two other parameters.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. RES
RANGE sets the resistance range between AUTO ranging (normal), LOW
range, and HIGH range. The purpose of these options is mainly for trouble-
shooting and they should not be changed during normal operation.

7.3.4 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST:MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 2560/2567 SPRT Module. The device number of the SPRT Input
Device is 1. The module number for the 2560/2567 module is its position in the
stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the 2560/2567 being
first, the module number for the 2560/2567 is 1. Table 23 shows the device
commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the SPRT Input Device.

Table 23 SPRT Module Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

CURR 1, 1.4 (2560) Excitation current, mA
0.1, 0.05 (2567)
SAMP 2, 10 Sample period, seconds
ARNG AUTO, LOW, HIGH Resistance range

115
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 2560/2567 SPRT Module
is placed first in the stack. These commands can be sent through any communi-
cation interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST: MOD1:DEV1:WRIT "CURR",1.4 Set the excitation current to 1.4
mA.
SYST:MOD1:DEV1:READ? "CURR" Read the excitation current.

7.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2560/2567 SPRT
Module.

7.4.1 Calibration Parameters

The resistance measurement is derived from the ratio between the voltage mea-
surements of the input resistor and reference resistor (100Ω) using the follow-
ing equation.
resistance = [8.3333 ⋅ 10 −4 (400_ ADJ )(ratio − 10 ) + 1.0][(100.0 + 100_ ADJ )ratio + 0_ ADJ(1.0 − ratio )]
.

Three adjustable calibration parameters are used for calibration: 0_ADJ,

100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ. 0_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 0Ω. It has
negligible effect at 100Ω but significant affect at higher resistances. 100_ADJ
directly affects the measurement at 100Ω. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and
proportionately greater effect the higher the resistance. 400_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 400Ω. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and 100Ω with
greater effect the more the resistance deviates from 0Ω or 100Ω. Each of the
parameters has a positive effect at their primary resistances: increasing the
value of the parameter increases the measured resistance. The default and theo-
retically normal value for each is 0.

7.4.2 Front-panel Access

The calibration parameters 0_ADJ, 100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ can be adjusted to
optimize the accuracy. They can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560
using the CAL DEVICE soft-key function. This is found in the MODULE
sub-menu. Pressing the CAL DEVICE soft-key shows a list of devices with
the module position number. Use the UD buttons to move the cursor to the
SPRT module and press ENTER.

116
 7 2560/2567 SPRT Module
Calibration

SELECT A DEVICE TO CALIBRATE

>SPRT 1
TCS 2
PRTS 3

After the device is selected a new window appears showing the parameters and
functions available from the device. New values can be entered for the parame-
ters using the numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. The UD buttons can be
used to move between parameters.

CALIBRATE DEVICE: SPRT

0 ADJ: 0.0
100 ADJ: 0.0
400 ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 05-21-96
SER NUM: A26123

For the 2560/2567 SPRT module the list of parameters includes 0_ADJ,
100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ as described above. The list also includes the calibra-
tion date (CAL DATE) parameter, used to record the date the module was cali-
brated, and the (SER NUM) parameter, used to record the serial number of the
module.

7.4.3 Calibration Procedure (2560)

Calibration requires adjustment of the 0_ADJ, 100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ parame-
ters at three specific input resistances. If the resistances used are approximately
0Ω, 100Ω and 400Ω respectively the adjustments are independent and the pro-
cedure is simple. The order in which the adjustments are performed is impor-
tant. The adjustment of the 400_ADJ parameter must be performed last as the
adjustments of 0_ADJ and 100_ADJ affect the measurement at 400Ω but
400_ADJ does not affect the measurements at 0Ω and 100Ω. Either channel
can be used for calibration. Set the conversion type to R(Ω) to display resis-
tance (see Section 5.2.1.1 ). The accuracy required of the resistance standards is
1/4 of the instrument accuracy: that is ±0.00012Ω at 0Ω, ±0.0005Ω (5 ppm) at
100Ω, and ±0.002Ω (5 ppm) at 400Ω. The recommended procedure is as
follows:

117
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

1. Connect a 0Ω resistor to the input and measure its resistance. If a short-

ing wire is used, the wire should run from the inside black terminal to
the inside red terminal to the outside red terminal then back across to the
outside black terminal. Note the average error in the measurement. Ad-
just the 0_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For exam-
ple, if the input is exactly 0.0000Ω and readout shows –0.0011Ω, 0_ADJ
should be adjusted by adding 0.0011 to it.
2. Connect a 100Ω resistor (5 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
100_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 100.0000Ω and the readout shows 100.0295Ω,
100_ADJ should be adjusted by subtracting 0.0295 from it.
3. Connect a 400Ω resistor (5 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
400_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 400.0000Ω and the readout shows 399.9913Ω,
400_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 0.0087 to it.
4. Record the date with the calibration date parameter.
5. Verify the accuracy at 0Ω, 25Ω or 50Ω, 100Ω, 200Ω, and 400Ω. Verify
the accuracy of both channels with selected resistances. The accuracy
must be within the short-term accuracy given in the specifications.

7.4.4 Calibration Procedure (2567)

The calibration procedure for the 2567 module is the same as the 2560 except
the parameters 0_ADJ, 1K_ADJ, and 4K_ADJ are used to calibrate the mea-
surement at 0Ω, 1KΩ, and 4KΩ respectively.

118
 8 2561 HTPRT Module
Description

8 2561 HTPRT Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2561 HTPRT
Module.

8.1 Description
The 2561 HTPRT Module is an add-on module that allows the 1560 to measure
temperature with high-temperature PRT sensors. It is capable of measuring
high-temperature with very high accuracy. It accepts four-wire sensors with
nominal resistances of 0.25Ω to 5Ω. It uses 3 or 5 mA excitation current to
minimize sensor self-heating. The excitation current alternates polarity to mini-
mize the effects of thermoelectric offsets. Two sensors can be connected to the
2561 simultaneously and measured alternately.

8.2 Specifications
Resistance range 0 to 25 Ω
Resistance accuracy, one-year1
0 to 2Ω 0.0001Ω
2 to 25Ω 50 ppm of reading

Resistance accuracy, short-term1, 2

0 to 2Ω 0.00008Ω
2 to 25Ω 40 ppm of reading

Temperature accuracy (typical, not including sensor uncer-

tainty)1 ±0.013°C
0°C ±0.018°C
100°C ±0.035°C
400°C ±0.060°C
800°C ±0.090°C
1200°C
Temperature coefficient1 2.5 ppm/°C
Excitation current 3, 5mA; 1 Hz
Maximum lead resistance 10Ω
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 2
Recommended operating temperature range1 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2 lbs.
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.

119
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include drift or calibration

uncertainties.

8.3 Operation
Using the 2561 HTPRT Module with the 1560 Black Stack is very simple. The
following sections explain the steps for setting up and using the 2561 to mea-
sure with HTPRTs. For instructions for installing the 2561 HTPRT Module
onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

8.3.1 Connecting a Probe

The 2561 HTPRT Module has ten terminal posts, five each for the two channels
(see Figure 14). The red terminals connect to one side of the sensor. One
sources current and the other senses the voltage. The black terminals connect to
the other side of the sensor. One sources current and the other senses the volt-
age. The green terminal connects to ground and can be used to ground a shield
wire. Two probes can be connected to the 2561 at once.
To connect two-wire probes to one channel, connect one wire to both red termi-
nals and the other wire to both black terminals. If there is a shield or guard wire
connect it to the green terminal.
To connect four-wire probes to one channel, connect the wires from one com-
mon pair (wires that are shorted together at the sensor element) to the red ter-
minals and the wires from the other pair to the black terminals. If there is a
shield or guard wire connect it to the green terminal.

HTPRT
MODULE
2561

Figure 14 Sensor Wiring Diagram

120
 8 2561 HTPRT Module
Operation

8.3.2 Setting Coefficients

Once an HTPRT probe is properly connected to the 2561, the 1560 can read its
resistance. To display temperature accurately, the 1560 must be programmed
with the characterization coefficients for the sensor. This is done using the
EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). The coeffi-
cient values are normally provided with the probe on a calibration report. Be
sure to select the proper range for ITS-90 characterizations.

8.3.3 Current
The 2561 sources current to the sensor and measures the resulting voltage
across the sensor to determine its resistance. The current alternates every 0.5
seconds to reduce the effects of thermoelectric offsets. The normal current is
3.0 mA. The current can be changed to 5.0 mA to test self-heating effects using
the SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE menu (see Section 5.4.2).
Change the CURRENT parameter from 3.0 to 5.0 and press ENTER.
The SET UP DEVICE function also allows access to one other parameter.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. The
purpose of this option is mainly for troubleshooting and it should not be
changed during normal operation.

8.3.4 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST:MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 2561 HTPRT Module. The device number of the HTPRT Input De-
vice is 1. The module number for the 2561 module is its position in the stack.
For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the 2561 being first, the
module number for the 2561 is 1. Table 24 shows the device commands used to
read or set the setup parameters of the HTPRT Input Device.

Table 24 HTPRT Module Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

CURR 3, 5 Excitation current, mA
SAMP 2, 10 Sample period, seconds

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 2561 HTPRT Module is
placed first in the stack. These commands can be sent through any communica-
tion interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST: MOD1:DEV1:WRIT "CURR",5 Set the excitation current to 5.0
mA.
SYST:MOD1:DEV1:READ? "CURR" Read the excitation current.

121
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

8.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2561 HTPRT Module.

8.4.1 Calibration Parameters

The resistance measurement is derived from the ratio between the voltage mea-
surements of the input resistor and the internal reference resistor (10Ω) using
the following equation.

resistance = (10.0 + 10 _ ADJ )ratio + 0 _ ADJ (1.0 − ratio )

Two adjustable calibration parameters are used for calibration: 0_ADJ and
10_ADJ. 0_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 0Ω. It has negligible effect
at 10Ω. 10_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 10Ω. It has negligible ef-
fect at 0Ω. Each of the parameters has a positive effect at their primary
resistances: increasing the value of the parameter increases the measured resis-
tance. The default and theoretically normal value for each is 0.

8.4.2 Front-panel Access

The calibration parameters 0_ADJ, and 10_ADJ can be adjusted to optimize the
accuracy. They can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560 using the CAL
DEVICE soft-key function. This is found in the MODULE sub-menu.
Pressing the CAL DEVICE soft-key shows a list of devices with the module
position number. Use the UD buttons to move the cursor to the HTPRT mod-
ule and press ENTER.

SELECT A DEVICE TO CALIBRATE

>HPRT 1
TCS 2
PRTS 3

After the device is selected a new window appears showing the parameters and
functions available from the device. New values can be entered for the parame-
ters using the numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. The UD buttons can be
used to move between parameters.

122
 8 2561 HTPRT Module
Calibration

CALIBRATE DEVICE: HPRT

0 ADJ: 0.0
10 ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 05-21-96
SER NUM: A38123

For the 2561 HTPRT module the list of parameters includes 0_ADJ and
10_ADJ as described above. The list also includes the calibration date (CAL
DATE) parameter, used to record the date the module was calibrated, and the
SER NUM parameter, used to record the serial number of the module.

8.4.3 Calibration Procedure

Calibration requires adjustment of the 0_ADJ, and 10_ADJ parameters at two
specific input resistances. If the resistances used are approximately 0Ω and
10Ω respectively the adjustments are independent and the procedure is simple.
Either channel can be used for calibration. Set the conversion type to R(Ω) to
display resistance (see Section 5.2.1.1 ). The accuracy required of the resis-
tance standards is 1/4 of the instrument accuracy: that is ±0.000025Ω at 0Ω and
±0.00012Ω (12 ppm) at 10Ω. The recommended procedure is as follows:
1. Connect a 0Ω resistor to the input and measure its resistance. If a short-
ing wire is used, the wire should run from the inside black terminal to
the inside red terminal to the outside red terminal then back across to the
outside black terminal. Note the average error in the measurement. Ad-
just the 0_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For exam-
ple, if the input is exactly 0.0Ω and readout shows –0.211mΩ, 0_ADJ
should be adjusted by adding 0.000211 to it.
2. Connect a 10Ω resistor (12 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
10_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if the
input is exactly 10.0Ω and the readout shows 10.02955Ω, 10_ADJ
should be adjusted by subtracting 0.02955 from it.
3. Record the date with the calibration date parameter.
4. Verify the accuracy at 0Ω, 1Ω or 25Ω, 10Ω, and 25Ω. Verify the accu-
racy of both channels with selected resistances. The accuracy must be
within the short-term accuracy given in the specifications.

123
 9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module
Description

9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2562/2568 PRT
Scanner Module.

9.1 Description
The 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module is an add-on module that allows the 1560
to measure temperature with up to eight SPRT, PRT, and RTD sensors. The
modules accept two-, three-, or four-wire sensors with nominal resistance of 25
and 100Ω (2562) or 500 and 1KΩ (2568). The excitation current alternates po-
larity to minimize the effects of thermoelectric offsets. Up to eight sensors can
be connected to the 2562/2568 simultaneously and measured alternately.

9.2 Specifications
2562 2568
Resistance range 0 to 400Ω 0 to 4 kΩ
Resistance accuracy, one-year 0 to 25Ω: 0.001Ω 0 to 250Ω: 0.01Ω
(Using four-wire connection)1, 3 25 to 400Ω: 40 ppm of read- 250 to 4KΩ: 40 ppm of read-
ing ing
Resistance accuracy, short-term 0 to 25Ω: 0.0005Ω 0 to 250Ω: 0.0075Ω
(Using four-wire connection)1, 2, 3 25 to 400Ω: 20 ppm of read- 250 to 4KΩ: 30 ppm of read-
ing ing
Temperature accuracy, one-year (Using
four-wire connection, not including probe
uncertainty)1, 3
–100°C ±0.006°C
0°C ±0.010°C
100°C ±0.014°C
200°C ±0.020°C
300°C ±0.024°C
400°C ±0.028°C
500°C ±0.034°C
600°C ±0.040°C
Temperature coefficient1 0.5 ppm/°C 2.5 ppm/°C
Excitation current 1.0, 1.4 mA; 1 Hz 0.1, 0.05 mA; 1 Hz
Maximum lead resistance 100Ω
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 8
Recommended operating temperature 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
range1
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2.5 lbs. (1.1 kg)

125
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

2562 2568
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.
2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include drift or calibration

uncertainties.
3 Add 0.01Ω to accuracy limits when using 3-wire sensors.

9.3 Operation
Using the 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module with the 1560 Black Stack is very
simple. The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using the
2562/2568 to measure with PRTs. For instructions on installing the 2562/2568
PRT Scanner Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

Wiring Detail Connector Detail

Top Top
4-Wire 3-Wire 2-Wire

5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Back Front Back Front

Sensor wire holes Sensor wire holes

facing back of module facing front of module

Rear Row

Front Row

PRT SCANNER
MODULE
2562

Figure 15 PRT Scanner Module Sensor Wiring Detail

126
 9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module
Operation

9.3.1 Wire Configuration

The 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module can accept sensors with two, three, or
four wires but all the sensors connected to the same row must be of the same
type. The connectors are arranged in two rows—front and rear. Each row can
be independently configured for four-wire (or two-wire) or three-wire opera-
tion. The wiring type is selected using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the PRTS device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the 2562/2568 Module:

SET UP DEVICE: PRTS 3

CURRENT: 1.0 LR
WIRES FR: 4
WIRES RR: 4
SAMP PER: 2
RES RANGE: AUTO

Select the wiring type for the front row and rear row with the WIRES FR and
WIRES RR parameters respectively. Move the cursor from line to line with the
UD buttons. The values of parameters can be changed using the LR but-
tons. Press ENTER to set the parameter. If 3 is selected for one row all the sen-
sors connected on that row must be three-wire. If 4 is selected for one row all
the sensors connected on that row must be two-wire or four-wire.

9.3.2 Connecting a Probe

Four-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 15. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One pair of wires connects to pins 2 and 3. The
opposite pair of wires connects to pins 4 and 5. Pins 2 and 5 source current and
pins 3 and 4 sense potential. When using four-wire sensors be sure to check that
the wiring configuration for that row is set to 4 as explained above!
Note: There are two types of sensor connectors. One has the wire holes facing
the front of the module and one has the wire holes facing the back of the mod-
ule as shown in the connector details in Figure 15.
Three-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 15. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One pair of wires connects to pins 2 and 3 from
the left. The opposite wire connects to pin 5. Pin 4 is left unconnected. Pins 2
and 5 source current. The potential is also sensed at pins 2 and 5 while the po-
tential at pin 3 is used to compensate for the lead resistances of wires 2 and 5.
Be sure to check that the wiring configuration for that row is set to 3 as ex-
plained previously! When using three-wire sensors the accuracy is reduced as

127
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

shown in the specifications. Also, be aware that any difference between the
resistances of the lead wires directly affects accuracy.
Two-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 15. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One wire connects to both pins 2 and 3 from the
left. The opposite wire connects to both pins 4 and 5. Be sure to check that the
wiring configuration for that row is set to 4 as explained above! When using
two-wire sensors the 2562/2568 is unable to compensate for lead resistance.

9.3.3 Setting Coefficients

Once a PRT or SPRT probe is properly connected to the 2562/2568, the 1560
can read out its resistance. To display temperature accurately the 1560 must be
programmed with the characterization coefficients for the sensor. This is done
using the EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). The
coefficient values are normally provided with the probe on a calibration report.
Be sure to select the proper range for ITS-90 characterizations. If IEC-751
RTDs are used you may select the CVD conversion and use R0: 100, ALPHA:
0.00385, DELTA: 1.507, and BETA: 0.111.

9.3.4 Current
The 2562/2568 sources current to the sensor and measures the resulting voltage
across the sensor to determine its resistance. The current alternates every 0.5
seconds to reduce the effects of thermoelectric offsets. The normal current is
1.0 mA. The current can be changed to 1.4 mA to test self-heating effects using
the SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE menu (see Section 5.4.2).
Change the CURRENT parameter from 1.0 to 1.4 and press ENTER.
The SET UP DEVICE function also allows access to two other parameters.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. RES
RANGE sets the resistance range between AUTO ranging (normal), LOW
range, and HIGH range. The purpose of these options is mainly for trouble-
shooting and they should not need to be changed during normal operation.

9.3.5 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST:MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module. The device number of the PRT
Scanner Input Device is 1. The module number for the 2562/2568 module is its
position in the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the
2562/2568 being second, the module number for the 2562/2568 is 2. Table 25

128
 9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module
Calibration

shows the device commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the PRT
Scanner Input Device.

Table 25 PRT Scanner Commands

Device
Command Parameter Description
CURR 1, 1.4 (2562) Excitation current, mA
0.1, 0.05 (2568)
WIRF 3, 4 Front-row wire configuration
WIRR 3, 4 Rear-row wire configuration
SAMP 2, 10 Sample period, seconds
ARNG AUTO, LOW, HIGH Resistance range

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 2562/2568 PRT Scanner
Module is placed second in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRIT “CURR”,1.4 Set the excitation current to 1.4
mA.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:READ? “CURR” Read the excitation current.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRIT “WIRF”,3 Set the front-row configuration to
three-wire.

9.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2562/2568 PRT Scanner
Module.

9.4.1 Calibration Parameters

Three adjustable parameters are used for calibration: 0_ADJ, 100_ADJ, and
400_ADJ. 0_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 0Ω. It has negligible ef-
fect at 100Ω but significant affect at higher resistances. 100_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 100Ω. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and
proportionately greater effect the higher the resistance. 400_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 400. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and 100Ω with
greater effect the more the resistance deviates from 0Ω or 100Ω. Each of the
parameters has positive effect at their primary resistances: increasing the value
of the parameter increases the measured resistance. The default and theoreti-
cally normal value for each is 0.

129
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

9.4.2 Front-Panel Access

The calibration parameters 0_ADJ, 100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ can be adjusted to
optimize the accuracy. They can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560
using the CAL DEVICE function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see Sec-
tion 5.4.3). Select the PRTS device. A window appears showing the calibration
parameters for the device.

CALIBRATE DEVICE: PRTS

0 ADJ: 0.0
100 ADJ: 0.0
400 ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 09-21-95
SER NUM: A31123

For the 2562/2568 PRT Scanner module the list of parameters includes 0_ADJ,
100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ as described above. The list also includes the calibra-
tion date (CAL DATE) parameter, used to record the date the module was cali-
brated, and the serial number (SER NUM) parameter, used to record the serial
number of the module. New values can be entered for the parameters using the
numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. The UD buttons can be used to move
between parameters.

9.4.3 Calibration Procedure (2562)

Calibration requires adjustment of the 0_ADJ, 100_ADJ, and 400_ADJ param-
eters at three specific input resistances. If the resistances used are approxi-
mately 0Ω, 100Ω and 400Ω respectively the adjustments are independent and
the procedure is simple. The order in which the adjustments are performed is
important. The adjustment of the 400_ADJ parameter must be done last as the
adjustments of 0_ADJ and 100_ADJ affect the measurement at 400Ω but
400_ADJ does not affect the measurements at 0Ω or 100Ω. Any channel can be
used for calibration. Set the conversion type to R(Ω) to display resistance (see
Section 5.2.1.1). The calibration should be performed with four-wire connec-
tion and with the wiring configuration set up for four-wire (see Section 9.3.1).
The accuracy required of the resistance standards is 1/4 of the instrument accu-
racy; that is ±0.00025Ω at 0Ω, ±0.001Ω (10 ppm) at 100Ω, and ±0.004Ω (10
ppm) at 400Ω. The recommended procedure is as follows:
1. Connect a 0Ω resistor to the input and measure its resistance. If a short-
ing wire is used the wire should run from pin 3 from the left to pin 4 to
pin 5 then back across to pin 2. Note the average error in the measure-
ment. Adjust the 0_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error.

130
 9 2562/2568 PRT Scanner Module
Calibration

For example, if the input is exactly 0.0000 and readout shows –0.0011,
0_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 0.0011 to it.
2. Connect a 100Ω resistor (10 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
100_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 100.0000Ω and the readout shows 100.0295Ω,
100_ADJ should be adjusted by subtracting 0.0295 from it.
3. Connect a 400Ω resistor (10 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
400_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 400.0000Ω and the readout shows 399.9913Ω,
400_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 0.0087 to it.
4. Record the date with the calibration date parameter.
5. Verify the accuracy at 0Ω, 25Ω or 50Ω, 100Ω, 200Ω, and 400Ω on se-
lected channels. Verify at least one resistance on each channel. The accuracy
must be within the short-term accuracy given in the specifications.
6. Set the wiring configuration of both rows to three-wire (see Section
9.3.1). Verify the accuracy with at least one resistance on each channel.
The accuracy must be within the short-term accuracy plus the additional
three-wire uncertainty as given in the specifications.

9.4.4 Calibration Procedure (2568)

The calibration procedure for the 2568 Module is the same as the 2562 except
the parameters 0_ADJ, 1K_ADJ, and 4K_ADJ are used to calibrate the mea-
surement at 0Ω, 1KΩ, and 4KΩ respectively.

131
 10 2563 Thermistor Module
Description

10 2563 Thermistor Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2563 Thermis-
tor Module.

10.1 Description
The 2563 Thermistor Module is an add-on module that allows the 1560 to mea-
sure temperature with thermistor sensors. It is capable of measuring tempera-
ture with very high accuracy, to 0.0013°C. It accepts nearly every type of
thermistor sensor, two or four-wire. It uses very small excitation currents to
minimize sensor self-heating. The excitation current alternates polarity to mini-
mize the effects of thermoelectric offsets. Two thermistor sensors can be con-
nected to the 2563 simultaneously and measured alternately.

10.2 Specifications
Resistance range 0 to 1 MΩ
Resistance accuracy, one-year1
0 to 2kΩ 0.1Ω
2k to 100kΩ 50 ppm of reading
100kΩ to 1 MΩ 200 ppm of reading
Resistance accuracy, short-term1, 2
0 to 2kΩ 0.08Ω
2k to 100kΩ 40 ppm of reading
100kΩ to 1 MΩ 180 ppm of reading
Temperature accuracy (with 10kΩ, α=0.04 sensor; not includ-
ing sensor uncertainty)1
0°C ±0.0013°C
25°C ±0.0013°C
50°C ±0.0013°C
75°C ±0.0015°C
100°C ±0.003°C
Temperature coefficient1 2.5 ppm/°C
Excitation current 2.0,10.0 μA; automatically selected; 1
Hz.
Maximum lead resistance 100Ω
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 2
Recommended operating temperature range1 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2 lbs. (0.9 kg.)
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.

133
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include drift or calibration

uncertainties.

10.3 Operation
Using the 2563 Thermistor Module with the 1560 Black Stack is very simple.
The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using the 2563 to
measure with thermistors. For instructions for installing the 2563 Thermistor
Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

10.3.1 Connecting a Thermistor

The 2563 Thermistor Module has ten terminal posts, five each for the two
channels (see Figure 16). The red terminals connect to one side of the sensor.
One sources current and the other senses the voltage. The black terminals con-
nect to the other side of the sensor. One sources current and the other senses the
voltage. The green terminal connects to ground and can be used to ground a
shield wire. Two thermistors can be connected to the 2563 at once.
To connect two-wire thermistors to one channel, connect one wire to both red
terminals and the other wire to both black terminals. If there is a shield or
guard wire connect it to the green terminal.
To connect four-wire thermistors to one channel, connect the wires from one
common pair (wires that are shorted together at the sensor element) to the red
terminals and the wires from the other pair to the black terminals. If there is a
shield or guard wire connect it to the green terminal.

THERMISTOR
MODULE
2563

Figure 16 Sensor Wiring Diagram

134
 10 2563 Thermistor Module
Operation

10.3.2 Setting Coefficients

Once a thermistor is properly connected to the 2563, the 1560 can read out its
resistance. To display temperature accurately, the 1560 must be programmed
with the characterization coefficients for the sensor. This is done using the
EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). The coeffi-
cient values are normally provided with the probe on a calibration report. Be
sure to select the proper equation type, R(T) or T(R).

10.3.3 Current
The 2563 sources current to the sensor and measures the resulting voltage
across the sensor to determine its resistance. The current alternates every 0.5
seconds to reduce the effects of thermoelectric offsets. The current automati-
cally switches between 2 μA and 10 μA depending on the resistance being
measured. At lower resistances (below about 50 kΩ) 10 μA is used. At higher
resistances 2 μA is used. You can force the current source to use 2 μA for low
resistances, if necessary, using the SET UP DEVICE function in the MOD-
ULE menu (see Section5.4.2). Change the CURRENT parameter from AUTO
to 2.0 and press ENTER.
The SET UP DEVICE function also allows access to two other parameters.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. RES
RANGE sets the resistance range between AUTO ranging (normal), LOW
range, and HIGH range. The purpose of these options is mainly for trouble-
shooting and they should not need to be changed during normal operation.

10.3.4 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 2563 Thermistor Module. The device number of the Thermistor In-
put Device is 1. The module number for the 2563 module is its position in the
stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the 2563 being third,
the module number for the 2563 is 3. Table 26 shows the device commands
used to read or set the setup parameters of the Thermistor Input Device.
Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 2563 Thermistor Input

Table 26 Thermistor Module Device Commands

Device Command
Parameter Description
CURR AUTO, 2, 10 Excitation current, μA
SAMP 2, 10 Sample period, seconds
ARNG AUTO, LOW, HIGH Resistance range

135
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Module is placed third in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRIT “CURR”,2 Set the excitation current to 2 μA.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:READ? “CURR” Read the excitation current.

10.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2563 Thermistor
Module.

10.4.1 Calibration Parameters

The resistance measurement is derived from the ratio between the voltage mea-
surements of the input resistor and reference resistor (20 kΩ) using the follow-
ing equation.
resistance = [1111 ⋅ 10 −6 × (100 K _ ADJ )(2 .0 ratio − 10 ) + 1.0][(1.0 ⋅ 10 4 + 10 K _ ADJ ) 2 .0 ratio + 0 _ ADJ(1.0 − 1.0 ratio )]
.
.

Three adjustable parameters are used for calibration: 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and
100K_ADJ. 0_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 0Ω. It has negligible ef-
fect at 10 kΩ but significant affect at higher resistances. 10K_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 10 kΩ. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and
proportionately greater effect the higher the resistance. 100K_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 100 kΩ. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and 10 kΩ with
greater effect the more the resistance deviates from 0Ω or 10 kΩ. Each of the
parameters has positive effect at their primary resistances: increasing the value
of the parameter increases the measured resistance. The default and theoreti-
cally normal value for each is 0.

10.4.2 Front-panel Access

The calibration parameters 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and 100K_ADJ can be adjusted
to optimize the accuracy. They can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560
using the CAL DEVICE soft-key function. This is found in the MODULE
sub-menu. Pressing the CAL DEVICE soft-key shows a list of devices with
the module position number. Use the UD buttons to move the cursor to the
STHR module and press ENTER.

136
 10 2563 Thermistor Module
Calibration

SELECT A DEVICE TO CALIBRATE

>SPRT 1
TCS 2
STHR 3

After the device is selected a new window appears showing the parameters and
functions available from the device. New values can be entered for the parame-
ters using the numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. The UD buttons can be
used to move between parameters.

CALIBRATE DEVICE: STHR

0 ADJ: 0.0
10K ADJ: 0.0
100K ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 05-21-96
SER NUM: A29123

For the 2563 Thermistor module the list of parameters includes 0_ADJ,
10K_ADJ, and 100K_ADJ as described above. The list also includes the cali-
bration date (CAL DATE) parameter, used to record the date the module was
calibrated, and the serial number parameter (SER NUM), used to record the se-
rial number of the module.

10.4.3 Calibration Procedure

Calibration requires adjustment of the 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and 100K_ADJ pa-
rameters at three specific input resistances. If the resistances used are approxi-
mately 0Ω, 10 kΩ and 100 kΩ respectively the adjustments are independent
and the procedure is simple. The order in which the adjustments are performed
is important. The adjustment of the 100K_ADJ parameter must be performed
last as the adjustments of 0_ADJ and 10K_ADJ affect the measurement at 100
kΩ but 100K_ADJ does not affect the measurements at 0Ω and 10 kΩ. Either
channel can be used for calibration. Set the conversion type to R(W) to display
resistance (see Section 5.2.1.1 ). The accuracy required of the resistance stan-
dards is 1/4 of the instrument accuracy: that is ±0.025Ω at 0Ω, ±0.12Ω (12
ppm) at 10 kΩ, and ±1.2Ω (12 ppm) at 100 kΩ.The recommended procedure is
as follows:

137
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

1. Connect a 0Ω resistor to the input and measure its resistance. If a short-

ing wire is used, the wire should run from the inside black terminal to
the inside red terminal to the outside red terminal then back across to the
outside black terminal. Note the average error in the measurement. Ad-
just the 0_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For exam-
ple, if the input is exactly 0.0Ω and readout shows -0.11Ω, 0_ADJ
should be adjusted by adding 0.11 to it.
2. Connect a 10 kΩ resistor (12 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
10K_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 10.00000 kΩ and the readout shows 10.00295 kΩ,
10K_ADJ should be adjusted by subtracting 2.95 from it.
3 Connect a 100 kΩ resistor (12 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure
its resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
100K_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 100.0000 kΩ and the readout shows 99.9913 kΩ,
100K_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 8.7 to it.
4. Record the date with the calibration date parameter.
5. Verify the accuracy at 0Ω, 4kΩ, 10kΩ, 40kΩ, 100kΩ, and 1MΩ on both
channels. Verify the accuracy of both channels with selected resistances.
The accuracy must be within the short-term accuracy given in the
specifications.

138
 11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module
Description

11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2564 Thermis-
tor Scanner Module.

11.1 Description
The 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module is an add-on module that allows the
1560 to measure temperature with up to eight thermistors. It accepts nearly ev-
ery type of thermistor sensor with either two, three, or four wires. It uses very
small excitation currents to minimize sensor self-heating. The excitation current
alternates polarity to minimize the effects of thermoelectric offsets. Up to eight
sensors can be connected to the 2564 simultaneously and measured alternately.

11.2 Specifications
Resistance range 0 to 1 MΩ
Resistance accuracy, one-year1
0 to 2 kΩ 0.2Ω
2 to 100 kΩ 100 ppm of reading
100 kΩ to 1 MΩ 300 ppm of reading
Resistance accuracy, short-term1, 2
0 to 2 kΩ 0.15Ω
2 to 100 kΩ 75 ppm of reading
100 kΩ to 1 MΩ 250 ppm of reading
Temparature accuracy, one-year (with 10kΩ, α=0.04 sensor;
not including sensor uncertainty)1
0°C ±0.0025°C
25°C ±0.0025°C
50°C ±0.0025°C
75°C ±0.003°C
100°C ±0.006°C
Temperature coefficient 2.5 ppm/°C
Excitation current 2, 10 μA; automatically selected: 1 Hz
Maximum lead resistance 100Ω
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 8
Recommended operating temperature range1 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2.5 lbs. (1.1 kg.)
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.
2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include drift or calibration

uncertainties.

139
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

11.3 Operation
Using the 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module with the 1560 Black Stack is very
simple. The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using the
2564 to measure with thermistors. For instructions for installing the 2564
Thermistor Scanner Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

11.3.1 Wire Configuration

The 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module can accept sensors with two, three, or
four wires but all the sensors connected to the same row must be of the same
type. The connectors are arranged in two rows—front and rear. Each row can
be independently configured for four-wire (or two-wire) or three-wire opera-
tion. The wiring type is selected using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the THRS device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the 2564 Module:

SET UP DEVICE: THRS 3

CURRENT(µA): AUTO LR
WIRES FR: 4
WIRES RR: 4
SAMP PER: 2
RES RANGE: AUTO

Select the wiring type for the front row and rear row with the WIRES FR and
WIRES RR parameters respectively. Move the cursor from line to line with the
UD buttons. The values of parameters can be changed using the LR but-
tons. Press ENTER to set the parameter. If 3 is selected for one row all the sen-
sors connected on that row must be three-wire. If 4 is selected for one row all
the sensors connected on that row must be two-wire or four-wire.

11.3.2 Connecting a Probe

Four-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 17. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One pair of wires connects to pins 2 and 3. The
opposite pair of wires connects to pins 4 and 5. Pins 2 and 5 source current and
pins 3 and 4 sense potential. When using four-wire sensors be sure to check that
the wiring configuration for that row is set to 4 as explained above!
Note: There are two types of sensor connectors. One has the wire holes facing
the front of the module and one has the wire holes facing the back of the mod-
ule as shown in the connector details in Figure 17.

140
 11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module
Operation

Three-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 17. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One pair of wires connects to pins 2 and 3. The
opposite wire connects to pin 5. Pin 4 is left unconnected. Pins 2 and 5 source
current. The potential is also sensed at pins 2 and 5 while the potential at pin 3
is used to compensate for the lead resistance of wires 2 and 5. Be sure to check
that the wiring configuration for that row is set to 3 as explained above!
Two-wire sensors are connected as shown in Figure 17. The shield, if used, is
connected to pin 1 on the left. One wire connects both pins 2 and 3. The oppo-
site wire connects to both pins 4 and 5. Be sure to check that the wiring config-
uration for that row is set to 4 as explained above! When using two-wire
sensors the 2564 is unable to compensate for lead resistance.

11.3.3 Setting Coefficients

Once a thermistor is properly connected to the 2564, the 1560 can read out its
resistance. To display temperature accurately the 1560 must be programmed
with the characterization coefficients for the sensor. This is done using the

Wiring Detail Connector Detail

Top Top
4-Wire 3-Wire 2-Wire

5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Back Front Back Front

Sensor wire holes Sensor wire holes

facing back of module facing front of module

Rear Row

Front Row

THERMISTOR
SCANNER
MODULE
2564

Figure 17 Thermistor Scanner Module Sensor Wiring Detail

141
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

EDIT PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). The coeffi-
cient values are normally provided with the probe on a calibration report. Be
sure to select the proper equation type, R(T) or T(R).

11.3.4 Current
The 2564 sources current to the sensor and measures the resulting voltage
across the sensor to determine its resistance. The current alternates every 0.5
seconds to reduce the effects of thermoelectric offsets. The current automati-
cally switches between 2 μA and 10 μA depending on the resistance being
measured. At lower resistances (below about 50 kΩ) 10 μA is used. At higher
resistances 2 μA is used. You can force the current source to use 2 μA for low
resistances if necessary using the SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE
menu (see Section 5.4.2). Change the CURRENT parameter from AUTO to 2.0
and press ENTER.
The SET UP DEVICE function also allows access to two other parameters.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. RES
RANGE sets the resistance range between AUTO ranging (normal), LOW
range, and HIGH range. The purpose of these options is mainly for trouble-
shooting and they should not need to be changed during normal operation.

11.3.5 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module. The device number of the
Thermistor Scanner Input Device is 1. The module number for the 2564 mod-
ule is its position in the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on mod-
ules, the 2564 being second, the module number for the 2564 is 2. Table 27
shows the device commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the
Thermistor Scanner Input Device.
Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 2563 Thermistor Scanner
Module is placed second in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRIT “CURR”,2 Set the excitation current to 2 μA.
SYST:MOD2:DEV1:READ? “CURR” Read the excitation current.

142
 11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module
Calibration

SYST:MOD2:DEV1:WRIT “WIRF”,4 Set the front-row configuration to

four-wire.

Table 27 Thermistor Scanner Module Commands

Device Command
Parameter Description
CURR AUTO, 2, 10 Excitation current, μA
WIRF 3, 4 Front-row wire
configuration
WIRR 3, 4 Rear-row wire
configuration
SAMP 2, 10 Sample period, seconds
ARNG AUTO, LOW, HIGH Resistance range

11.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2564 Thermistor Scan-
ner Module.

11.4.1 Calibration Parameters

Three adjustable parameters are used for calibration: 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and
100K_ADJ. 0_ADJ directly affects the measurement at 0Ω. It has negligible ef-
fect at 10 kΩ but significant affect at higher resistances. 10K_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 10 kΩ. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and
proportionately greater effect the higher the resistance. 100K_ADJ directly af-
fects the measurement at 100 kΩ. It has negligible effect at 0Ω and 10 kΩ with
greater effect the more the resistance deviates from 0Ω or 10 kΩ. Each of the
parameters has positive effect at their primary resistances: increasing the value
of the parameter increases the measured resistance. The default and theoreti-
cally normal value for each is 0.

11.4.2 Front-Panel Access

The calibration parameters 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and 100K_ADJ can be adjusted
to optimize the accuracy. They can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560
using the CAL DEVICE function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see Sec-
tion 5.4.3). Select the THRS device. A window appears showing the calibration
parameters for the device.

143
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

CALIBRATE DEVICE: THRS

0 ADJ: 0.0
10K ADJ: 0.0
100K ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 09-21-95
SER NUM: A32123

For the 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module the list of parameters includes
0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and 100K_ADJ as described above. The list also includes
the calibration date (CAL DATE) parameter, used to record the date the module
was calibrated, and the serial number parameter (SER NUM), used to record
the serial number of the module. New values can be entered for the parameters
using the numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. The UD buttons can be used
to move between parameters.

11.4.3 Calibration Procedure

Calibration requires adjustment of the 0_ADJ, 10K_ADJ, and 100_ADJ param-
eters at three specific input resistances. If the resistances used are approxi-
mately 0Ω, 10 kΩ and 100 kΩ respectively the adjustments are independent
and the procedure is simple. The order in which the adjustments are performed
is important. The adjustment of the 100K_ADJ parameter must be done last as
the adjustments of 0_ADJ and 10K_ADJ affect the measurement at 100 kΩ but
100K_ADJ does not affect the measurements at 0Ω or 10 kΩ. Any channel can
be used for calibration. Set the conversion type to R(Ω) to display resistance
(see Sec. 4.2.1.1). The accuracy required of the resistance standards is 1/4 of
the instrument accuracy; that is 0.05Ω at 0Ω, 0.25Ω (25 ppm) at 10 kΩ, and
2.5Ω (25 ppm) at 100 kΩ. The recommended procedure is as follows:
1. Connect a 0Ω resistor to the input and measure its resistance. If a short-
ing wire is used the wire should run from pin 3 from the left to pin 4 to
pin 5 then back across to pin 2. Note the average error in the measure-
ment. Adjust the 0_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error.
For example, if the input is exactly 0.0Ω and readout shows –0.11Ω,
0_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 0.11 to it.
2. Connect a 10 kΩ resistor (25 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure its
resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
10K_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 10.00000 kΩ and the readout shows 10.00295 kΩ,
10K_ADJ should be adjusted by subtracting 2.95 from it.

144
 11 2564 Thermistor Scanner Module
Calibration

3. Connect a 100 kΩ resistor (25 ppm accuracy) to the input and measure
its resistance. Note the average error in the measurement. Adjust the
100K_ADJ parameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if
the input is exactly 100.0000 kΩ and the readout shows 99.9913 kΩ,
100K_ADJ should be adjusted by adding 8.7 to it.
4. Record the date with the calibration date parameter.
5. Verify the accuracy at 0Ω, 4kΩ, 10kΩ, 40kΩ, 100kΩ, and 1MΩ. Verify
at least one resistance on each channel. The accuracy must be within the
short-term accuracy given in the specifications.
6. Set the wiring configuration of both rows to three-wire (see Section
11.3.1). Verify the accuracy with at least one resistance on each channel.
The accuracy must be within the short-term accuracy given in the
specifications.

145
 12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module
Description

12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module

NOTE: An Application Note for use of Tungsten-Rhenium and other

thermocouples is available at www.hartscientific.com.

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2565 Precision
Thermocouple Module.

12.1 Description
The 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module is an add-on module that allows the
1560 to measure temperature with extreme accuracy using thermocouples. Two
thermocouples can be connected to the 2565 simultaneously and measured al-
ternately. The module’s unique clamping receptacles accept thermocouples ter-
minated with either bare wires or subminiature thermocouple plugs. Sensors
inside the receptacles measure temperature for precise automatic cold-junction
compensation. For even greater accuracy, the 2565 also allows you to use an
external cold-junction reference.

12.2 Specifications
Voltage range 0 to 100 mV
Voltage accuracy, one-year1
0 to 50 mV 0.002 mV
50 to 100 mV 40 ppm of reading
Voltage accuracy, short-term1,2
0 to 50 mV 0.0015 mV
50 to 100 mV 30 ppm of reading
Internal CJC accuracy 1 0.05°C (0.09°F)
Temperature accuracy, external CJC1,3
Type E @ 800°C ±0.025°C (0.045°F)
Type J @ 1000°C ±0.039°C (0.070°F)
Type K @ 1200°C ±0.055°C (0.10°F)
Type N @ 1200°C ±0.054°C (0.098°F)
Type S @ 1400°C ±0.17°C (0.31°F)
Type T @ 300°C ±0.035°C (0.063°F)
Type Au/Pt @ 1000°C ±0.078°C (0.14°F)
Temperature accuracy, internal CJC1,3
Type E @ 800°C ±0.065°C (0.12°F)
Type J @ 1000°C ±0.083°C (0.15°F)
Type K @ 1200°C ±0.10°C (0.18°F)
Type N @ 1200°C ±0.090°C (0.16°F)
Type S @ 1400°C ±0.19°C (0.35°F)
Type T @ 300°C ±0.070°C (0.13°F)
Type Au/Pt @ 1000°C ±0.092°C (0.17°F)
Voltage temperature coefficient 1 5 ppm/°C
(2.8 ppm/°F)

147
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Internal CJC temperature coefficient 1 0.005°C/°C (0.005°F/°F)

Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 2
Recommended operating temperature range 1 18 to 28°C
(64 to 82°F)
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C
(40 to 95°F)
Weight 2.5 lbs.
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.
2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include long-term drift or

calibration uncertainties.
3 Temperature accuracies do not include sensor uncertainties. Accuracies using external CJC do not in-
clude cold-junction reference uncertainty.

12.2.1 Calculating Accuracy

The temperature accuracy specifications listed are derived from the voltage ac-
curacy and CJC accuracy. The accuracy of a thermocouple readout device in
terms of temperature depends on the slope of the voltage-temperature relation-
ship (Seebeck coefficient) at the temperature of interest (which depends on the
type of thermocouple and its temperature), the accuracy of the voltage mea-
surement, the slope of the voltage-temperature relationship at the cold-junction
temperature, and the accuracy of the cold-junction temperature according to the
following equation:
uv S ( tCJ )
ut = + uCJ
S ( t) S ( t)

For the 2565/2566 modules the voltage accuracy is specified. If internal CJC is
used, its accuracy is also specified. If external CJC is used, it is up to the user
to determine the accuracy of the cold-junction temperature. The temperature
accuracies listed above for external CJC are assuming negligible cold-junction
temperature error.
Here is an example of how temperature accuracy is calculated. Suppose we are
measuring with a type T thermocouple at –200°C and using internal CJC. At
–200°C a T thermocouple has a Seebeck coefficient of about 0.016 mV/°C, and
at about 25°C (the cold-junction temperature) the Seebeck coefficient is about
0.041 mV/°C. From the specifications, the voltage accuracy of the 2565 is
0.002 mV (at the voltage we are measuring) and the CJC accuracy is 0.05°C.
Applying the above equation for this situation gives a temperature accuracy of
0.253°C:
0.002 mV 0.041 mV
ut = + °C
. °C + 0128
0.05°C = 0125 . °C = 0.253°C
0.016 mV
°C
0.016 mV
°C

148
 12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module
Operation

It could be argued that the voltage errors and CJC errors are uncorrelated so the
two errors should be combined using a root-sum-square calculations. However,
for simplicity, in our calculations we have just added the two components. The
Seebeck coefficients for various types of thermocouples at various temperatures
can be found in the standard tables for thermocouples, such as NIST Mono-
graph 175.

12.3 Operation
Using the 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module with the 1560 Black Stack is
very simple. The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using
the 2565 to measure with thermocouples. For instructions for installing the
2565 Precision Thermocouple Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

12.3.1 Connecting a Thermocouple

The 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module accepts both bare wires and sub-
miniature size thermocouple plugs. If a plug is used it must match the thermo-
couple type for the internal CJC to be accurate. For example, if you are using a
type K thermocouple you must also use a type K plug.
Each receptacle has a cam lever next to it that opens and closes the receptacle
as shown in Figure 18. Flipping the lever out opens the receptacle. While the
receptacle is open insert the wires or plug. The positive terminal is to the left
and the negative terminal is to the right. Push the lever back in to clamp the
wires or plug. After attaching a thermocouple to the 2565 wait two minutes be-
fore measuring for best results. Some shift in the measurement may occur as
temperature gradients settle .
The input channels are numbered from left to right as explained in Section
4.5.1 and Figure 7.

12.3.2 Selecting the Thermocouple Type

To display temperature accurately each channel of the 2565 must be pro-
grammed for the correct thermocouple type. This is done using the EDIT
PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). For example, if you
are using a type K thermocouple on Input 1 select the EDIT PROBE function
in the PROBE menu, select input channel 1, and set the CONVERSION type
to TC-K. The 1560 converts voltage to temperature according to the standard
formulas given in NIST Monograph 175 (see Section 5.2.1.10).
When calibrating thermocouples, or the 2565 module itself, it is often useful to
display voltage instead of temperature. Voltage is displayed by setting the
CONVERSION type to V (see Section 5.2.1.9).

12.3.3 Selecting the CJC Type

The 1560 and 2565 can operate with either internal or external cold-junction
compensation (CJC). CJC is necessary because a thermocouple can only mea-

149
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Closed

Open

+ –
PRECISION
THERMOCOUPLE
MODULE
+ –
2565

Figure 18 2565 Module Thermocouple Receptacle Operation

sure relative temperatures between its measuring junction and reference junc-
tion. In order to determine the absolute temperature, the temperature of the
reference junction must be known. With internal CJC the temperature of the
reference junction (where the thermocouple connects to the 2565) is measured
automatically with an internal thermistor temperature sensor and used in the
calculation of the absolute temperature of the thermocouple. This method is
most convenient and is often used. However, it has limitations of accuracy. This
is because it is difficult to place the sensor very close to the connectors and
maintain a low thermal gradient between the sensor and connectors. With exter-
nal CJC a reference junction is created externally and copper wires connect the
reference junction to the 2565. The reference junction is placed in an ice bath
or other temperature source that has a precisely known and stable temperature.
This technique offers improved accuracy but is less convenient because of the
more complicated connection scheme and the requirement of a precision tem-
perature source.
The CJC type is selected using the EDIT PROBE function in the PROBE
menu. Set the CJC parameter to INTERNAL (this is the default) for internal
CJC. With internal CJC the CJC TEMP value is measured automatically so you
do not need to enter a value. When using external CJC with an external temper-
ature source and reference junction set CJC to EXTERNAL. You must also en-
ter the temperature of the external reference junction for the CJC TEMP
parameter. For instance, if the reference junction is placed in an ice bath set
CJC TEMP to 0.0.

150
 12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module
Operation

12.3.4 Using Calibrated Thermocouples

The 1560 normally converts voltage to temperature according to the standard
equations given in NIST Monograph 175. However, the actual voltage-tempera-
ture characteristics of a specific thermocouple may deviate from the standard
equations. The 1560 can be programmed to adjust for this error. This requires
that the thermocouple be calibrated so that its errors are known.
You can specify the adjustments in two ways. One is to specify temperature ad-
justments at several temperatures (see Section 5.2.1.10). For instance, if the
thermocouple was calibrated and found to measure high by 0.06°C at 500°C
you would enter –0.06 as the adjustment with 500°C as the calibration tempera-
ture. You can specify adjustments for up to three calibration points. At tempera-
tures between the calibration points a polynomial equation is used to estimate
the required adjustment.
For types R, S, and gold-platinum thermocouples the adjustment can also be
specified by coefficients of a second-order polynomial (see Section 5.2.1.10).

12.3.5 Suggestions for Optimum Accuracy

The sensitivity of thermocouple measurements, especially when using internal
CJC, requires that the user take certain precautions to ensure accuracy.

12.3.5.1 Warm-up Time

Measurements may change slightly as the 2565 module warms up after being
powered on. For best accuracy allow the 2565 to warm up for one hour before
making precision measurements.

12.3.5.2 Ambient Environment

When using internal cold-junction compensation the connectors and internal
sensors are sensitive to ambient temperature disturbances. The 2565 should be
operated in a stable environment free from large and sudden ambient tempera-
ture variations. The 2565 will also be more accurate if the ambient temperature
at which it is operated is close to the ambient temperature at which it was
calibrated.

12.3.5.3 Thermal Settling

When a thermocouple is plugged into the 2565 a certain amount of time is re-
quired before heat in the connector and receptacle becomes evenly distributed.
For best results wait at least two minutes before making precision
measurements.

12.3.5.4 Ground Currents

The 2565 inputs are electrically isolated from all other components of the 1560
system and ground. This helps prevent ground loops that can produce noise and
errors in the measurements. However, the two input channels are not isolated

151
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

from each other. Errors can result if voltage potentials are imposed between the
two thermocouples. Thus it is recommended that isolated thermocouple junc-
tions be used whenever possible. If grounded thermocouples must be used then
take precautions to ensure that potentials do not exist between the
thermocouples.

12.3.6 Setup Parameters

The SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE menu (see Section 5.4.2) al-
lows access to two setup parameters.
GROUND allows you to internally connnect the input circuit to ground by set-
ting this option ON. This may help to reduce noise.
SAMP PER selects the sample period between 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. The
purpose of this option is mainly for troubleshooting and it should not need to
be accessed or changed during normal operation.

12.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2565 Precision Thermo-
couple Module.

12.4.1 Calibration Parameters

Eight adjustable parameters are used for calibration. They are listed in Ta-
ble 28. The AMP GA parameter is set at the factory according to the type of
amplifier installed. It should not need to be changed after initial calibration. If
the voltage measurement is in error by a factor of nearly 2 the AMP GA param-
eter may be incorrect.

Table 28 Precision Thermocouple Module calibration parameters

Parameter Description
AMP GA Set to the nominal gain of the amplifier
OS 1 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 1 at 0 mV
OS 2 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 2 at 0 mV
GA 1 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 1 at 100 mV
GA 2 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 2 at 100 mV
CJ 1 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 1
CJ 2 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 2
CAL DATE Records the date the module was calibrated

12.4.2 Front-Panel Access

The calibration parameters can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560 us-
ing the CAL DEVICE function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see Section

152
 12 2565 Precision Thermocouple Module
Calibration

5.4.3.). Select the PTC device. A window appears showing the calibration pa-
rameters for the device.

CALIBRATE DEVICE: TCS

AMP GA: 1
OS 1: 0.0007
OS 2: 0.0005
GA 1: -0.2138
GA 2: -0.2134
CJ 1: 0.273 $

New values can be entered for the parameters using the numeric buttons and
pressing ENTER. The buttons can be used to move between parameters.

12.4.3 Calibration Procedure

Calibration is performed in two steps. First the voltage measurement is cali-
brated then the internal CJC is calibrated. The equipment required are a pro-
grammable voltage source, a precision voltmeter with an accuracy of 10 ppm or
better, a thermocouple (preferably type E), and a temperature source between 0
and 30°C. The combined accuracy of the reference thermocouple and tempera-
ture source must be 0.012°C or better between the reference temperature and
ambient temperature. At each step during the calibration procedure the readings
should be allowed to settle for at least two minutes before recording the mea-
surement. Also, the 2565 should be allowed to warm up for at least one hour
after power up prior to calibration. The recommended procedure is as follows:
1. Connect the voltage source to Input 1, set it for 0 mV, and measure the
voltage with the 1560 (using channel 1) and the voltmeter simulta-
neously. Adjust the OS 1 parameter by subtracting the measured error.
For example, if the 1560 measures –0.0006 mV, adjust the OS 1 parame-
ter by adding 0.0006 to it. If it was previously 0.0000 it should now be
0.0006.
2. Connect the voltage source to Input 2, set it for 0 mV, and measure the
voltage with the 1560 (using channel 2) and the voltmeter simulta-
neously. Adjust the OS 2 parameter by subtracting the measured error.
3. Connect the voltage source to Input 1, set it for 100 mV, and measure the
voltage with the 1560 (using channel 1) and the voltmeter simulta-
neously. Adjust the GA 1 parameter by subtracting the measured error.
For example, if the input is exactly 100.0000 mV and the 1560 shows
100.2953 mV, the GA 1 parameter should be adjusted by subtracting
0.2953 from it. If it was previously 0.0000 it should now be –0.2953.

153
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

4. Connect the voltage source to Input 2, set it for 100 mV, and measure the
voltage with the 1560 (using channel 2) and the voltmeter simulta-
neously. Adjust the GA 2 parameter by subtracting the measured error.
5. Verify the voltage accuracy of both input channels at 0 and 50 mV. The
accuracy must be within the short-term voltage accuracy given in the
specifications.
6. Connect the calibrated thermocouple to Input 1 and insert the junction
into the temperature source. Measure the temperature with the 2565 (use
channel 1 and be sure to program the channel with the correct thermo-
couple type). Adjust the CJ 1 parameter by subtracting the measured er-
ror. For example, if the thermocouple temperature is actually 0.0°C but
the 1560 reads 0.184°C, the CJ OS 1 parameter should be adjusted by
subtracting 0.184 from it. If it was previously 0.000 it should now be
–0.184.
7. Connect the calibrated thermocouple to Input 2. Measure the temperature
with the 2565 (use channel 2 and be sure to program the channel with
the correct thermocouple type). Adjust the CJ 2 parameter by subtracting
the measured error.
8. Verify the temperature accuracy of both input channels using the cali-
brated thermocouple and temperature source. The accuracy should be
within 75% of the internal CJC accuracy given in the specifications.
9. Record the date with the CAL DATE parameter.

154
 13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module
Description

13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module

NOTE: An Application Note for use of Tungsten-Rhenium and other

thermocouples is available at www.hartscientific.com.

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 2566 Thermo-
couple Scanner Module.

13.1 Description
The 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module is an add-on module that allows the
1560 to measure temperature with up to 12 thermocouples simultaneously. It
accepts nearly every type of thermocouple sensor. It incorporates built-in
cold-junction compensation (CJC) for convenience. Alternately, external CJC
can be used for greater accuracy. Up to 12 sensors can be connected to the 2566
simultaneously and measured alternately.

13.2 Specifications
Voltage range 0 to 100 mV
Voltage accuracy, one-year1
0 to 50 mV 0.004 mV
50 to 100 mV 80 ppm of reading
Voltage accuracy, short-term1,2
0 to 50 mV 0.003 mV
50 to 100 mV 60 ppm of reading
Internal CJC accuracy1 0.2°C (0.36°F)
Temparature accuracy, external CJC 1,3
Type E @ 800°C ±0.05°C (0.09°F)
Type J @ 1000°C ±0.08°C (0.14°F)
Type K @ 1200°C ±0.11°C (0.20°F)
Type N @ 1200°C ±0.11°C (0.20°F)
Type S @ 1400°C ±0.33°C (0.60°F)
Type T @ 300°C ±0.07°C (0.13°F)
Temparature accuracy, internal CJC1,3
Type E @ 800°C ±0.21°C (0.38°F)
Type J @ 1000°C ±0.25°C (0.46°F)
Type K @ 1000°C ±0.33°C (0.60°F)
Type N @ 1000°C ±0.26°C (0.47°F)
Type S @ 1400°C ±0.43°C (0.78°F)
Type T @ 300°C ±0.21°C (0.38°F)
Voltage temperature coefficient1 10 ppm/°C (5.6 ppm/°F)
Internal CJC temperature coefficient1 ±0.03°C/°C (±0.03°F/°F)
Sample time 2 seconds
Number of channels 12

155
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Recommended operating temperature1 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)

Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2.5 lbs.
1The accuracy specifications apply within the recommended operating temperature range. Accuracy limits
are increased by a factor of the temperature coefficient outside this range.
2 Short-term accuracy includes nonlinearity and noise uncertainties. It does not include long-term drift or

calibration uncertainties.
3 Temperature accuracies do not include sensor uncertainties. Accuracies using external CJC do not in-
clude reference junction temperature uncertainty.

13.2.1 Calculating Accuracy

Please refer to Section 12.2.1 for a discussion on calculating temperature accu-
racies for thermocouple measurements.

13.3 Operation
Using the 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module with the 1560 Black Stack is
very simple. The following sections explain the steps for setting up and using
the 2566 to measure with thermocouples. For instructions for installing the
2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module onto the 1560 see Section 4.1.

13.3.1 Connecting a Thermocouple

The 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module accepts both standard and subminia-
ture size thermocouple connectors. The connection is made with the positive
terminal on the left and the negative terminal on the right. You must use a con-
nector that matches the thermocouple type for the internal CJC to be accurate.
For example, if you are using a type K thermocouple you must also use a type
K connector which is made from the same type of metal. After inserting the
thermocouple connector into the 2566, wait two minutes before measuring for
best results.
The input channels are numbered from left to right and front to back as ex-
plained in Section 4.5.1 and Figure 7.

13.3.2 Selecting the Thermocouple Type

To display temperature accurately the 1560 must be programmed with the cor-
rect thermocouple type for each input channel. This is done using the EDIT
PROBE soft-key in the PROBE menu (see Section 5.2.1). For example, if you
are using a type K thermocouple on Input 3 select the EDIT PROBE function
in the PROBE menu, select input channel 3, and set the CONVERSION type
to TC-K. The 1560 converts voltage to temperature according to the standard
formulas given in NIST Monograph 175 (see Section 5.2.1.10).
When calibrating thermocouples or the 2566 module itself, it is often useful to
display voltage instead of temperature. Voltage is displayed by setting the
CONVERSION type to V (see Section 5.2.1.9).

156
 13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module
Operation

13.3.3 Selecting the CJC Type

The 1560 allows for either internal or external CJC. CJC is necessary because
thermocouples are only able to measure relative temperatures between the mea-
suring junction and the reference junction. In order to determine the absolute
temperature, the temperature of the reference junction must be known. With in-
ternal CJC the temperature of the reference junction, assumed to be the point
where the thermocouple connects to the 2566, is measured using an internal
thermistor temperature sensor. This method offers convenience and is most of-
ten used. However, it has limitations of accuracy. This is because it is difficult
to place the sensor very close to the connectors and maintain a low thermal dif-
ferential between the sensor and connectors. With external CJC a reference
junction is created externally and copper wires connect the reference junction
to the 2566. The reference junction is placed in an ice bath or other temperature
source that has a precisely known and stable temperature. This technique offers
improved accuracy but is less convenient because of the more complicated con-
nection scheme and the requirement of a precision temperature source.
The 1560 allows the use of either internal or external CJC. Most applications
will use internal CJC where the thermocouple probe is connected directly to the
2566. The CJC type is selected using the EDIT PROBE function in the
PROBE menu. Set the CJC parameter to INTERNAL (this is the default). With
internal CJC the CJC TEMP value is measured automatically and so you do not
need to enter a value. When using external CJC with an external temperature
source and reference junction set CJC to EXTERNAL. You must also enter the
temperature of the external reference junction for the CJC TEMP parameter.
For instance, if the reference junction is placed in an ice bath set CJC TEMP to
0.0.

13.3.4 Using Calibrated Thermocouples

The 1560 normally converts voltage to temperature according to the standard
equations given in NIST Monograph 175. However, the actual voltage-tempera-
ture characteristics of thermocouples may deviate from the standard equations.
For improved accuracy the 2566 can be programmed to make adjustments to
the standard equations. This requires that the thermocouple be calibrated so that
its errors are known.
You can specify the adjustments in two ways. One is to specify temperature ad-
justments at several temperatures (see Section 5.2.1.10). For instance, if the
thermocouple was calibrated and found to measure high by 0.06°C at 500°C
you would enter –0.06 as the adjustment with 500°C as the calibration tempera-
ture. You can specify adjustments for up to three calibration points. At tempera-
tures between the calibration points a polynomial equation is used to estimate
the required adjustment.
For type R and S and gold-platinum thermocouples the adjustment can be spec-
ified by coefficients of a second-order polynomial (see Section 5.2.1.10).

157
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

13.3.5 Suggestions for Optimum Accuracy

The sensitivity of thermocouple measurements, especially when using internal
CJC, requires that the user take certain precautions to ensure accuracy as ex-
plained in the following sections.

13.3.5.1 Warm-up Time

Measurements may change slightly as the 2566 module warms up after being
powered on. For best accuracy allow the 2566 to warm up for one hour before
making precision measurements.

13.3.5.2 Ambient Environment

When using internal cold-junction compensation the connectors and internal
sensors are sensitive to ambient temperature disturbances. The 2566 should be
operated in a stable environment free from large and sudden ambient tempera-
ture variations. The 2566 will also be more accurate if the ambient temperature
in which it is operated is close to the ambient temperature in which it was cali-
brated. Internal CJC is more accurate for the eight inputs near the center of the
module. Use these channels for more precise measurements rather than the four
inputs on the outside.

13.3.5.3 Thermal Settling

The process of removing and inserting thermocouple plugs into the 2566 pro-
duces temperature transients. This heat can cause a small error in the measure-
ment for up to two to four minutes after the thermocouple is plugged in. For
best results wait at least two minutes before making precision measurements.

13.3.6 Setup Parameters

The SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE menu (see Section 5.4.2) al-
lows access to two setup parameters. SAMP PER selects the sample period be-
tween 2 (normal) and 10 seconds. POS shows the detected position of the
module in the stack. The purpose of these options is mainly for troubleshooting
and they should not need to be accessed or changed during normal operation.

13.4 Calibration
This section explains the calibration procedure for the 2566 Thermocouple
Scanner Module.

13.4.1 Calibration Parameters

Eighteen adjustable parameters are used for calibration. They are listed in Table
29.

158
 13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module
Calibration

Table 29 Themocouple Scanner Module calibration parameters

Parameter Description
AMP GA Set to the nominal gain of the amplifier, type 1 or 2
OS 1 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Inputs 1–6 at 0 mV
GA 1 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Inputs 1–6 at 100 mV
CJ OS 1 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 1
CJ OS 2 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 2
CJ OS 3 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 3
CJ OS 4 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 4
CJ OS 5 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 5
CJ OS 6 Adjusts the internal CJC accuracy of Input 6
OS 2 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Inputs 7–12 at 0 mV
GA 2 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Inputs 7–12 at 100 mV
CJ OS 7 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 7
CJ OS 8 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 8
CJ OS 9 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 9
CJ OS 10 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 10
CJ OS 11 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 11
CJ OS 12 Adjusts the voltage accuracy of Input 12
CAL DATE Records the date the module was calibrated

13.4.2 Front-Panel Access

The calibration parameters can be accessed from the front panel of the 1560 us-
ing the CAL DEVICE function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see Section
5.4.3). Select the TCS device. A window appears showing the calibration pa-
rameters for the device. The calibration parameters appear in two screens. The
two screens appear alternately each time the device calibration window ap-
pears. The first screen contains the first nine parameters—AMP GA through CJ
OS 6.

159
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

CALIBRATE DEVICE: TCS

AMP GA: 1
OS 1: 0.0006
GA 1: –0.257
CJ OS 1: –0.08
CJ OS 2: –0.11
CJ OS 3: –0.07 $

The second screen contains the parameters OS 2 through CJ OS 12 and also

CAL DATE.

CALIBRATE DEVICE: TCS

OS 2: –0.0004
GA 2: –0.241
CJ OS 7: –0.05
CJ OS 8: 0.02
CJ OS 9: –0.10
CJ OS 10: –0.08 $

13.4.3 Calibration Procedure

Calibration is performed in two steps. The voltage measurement is calibrated
first and then the internal CJC. Calibration is performed on sets of three chan-
nels at a time. The equipment required are a copper shorting plug, a program-
mable voltage source, a precision voltmeter with an accuracy of 20 ppm or
better, a thermocouple (preferably type E) with a calibrated accuracy of
0.025°C or better from 0 to 30°C, and a temperature source between 0 and
30°C with an accuracy of 0.025°C. The AMP GA parameter is set at the factory
according to the type of amplifier installed and should never be changed. At
each step during the calibration procedure the readings should be allowed to
settle for at least five minutes before recording the measurement. Also, the
2566 should be allowed to warm up for one hour after power up prior to cali-
bration. The recommended procedure is as follows:
1. Connect the copper short to Input 2 (or any of inputs 1 through 6) and
measure voltage. Adjust the OS 1 parameter by subtracting the measured
error. For example, if the Black Stack measures –0.0013 mV, adjust the
OS 1 parameter by adding 0.0013 to it. This adjusts the offset for chan-
nels 1 through 6.
2. Connect the voltage source to Input 2, set it for 100 mV, and measure the

160
 13 2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module
Calibration

voltage with the 1560 and the voltmeter simultaneously. Note the aver-
age error in the 2566 measurement. Adjust the GA 1 parameter by sub-
tracting the measured error. For example, if the input is exactly 100.0000
mV and the 1560 shows 100.2953 mV, the GA 1 parameter should be
adjusted by subtracting 0.2953 from it. This adjusts the gain for channels
1 through 6.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for Input 8 (or any of inputs 7 through 12) adjusting
the OS 2 and GA 2 parameters. This calibrates the voltage measusrement
of inputs 7 through 12.
4. Verify the voltage accuracy of each of the 12 input channels at 0 and 50
mV. The accuracy must be within the short-term voltage accuracy given
in the specifications.
5. Connect the calibrated thermocouple to Input 1 and insert the measuring
junction into the temperature source. Measure the temperature with the
2566 (be sure to program the 1560 with the correct thermocouple type).
Note the average error in the 2566 measurement. Adjust the CJ OS 1 pa-
rameter by subtracting the measured error. For example, if the tempera-
ture measurement should be exactly 0.0°C but the 1560 reads 0.18°C, the
CJ OS 1 parameter should be adjusted by subtracting 0.18 from it. This
adjusts the CJC for Input 1.
6. Repeat step 5 for Inputs 2 through 12 adjusting CJ OS 2 through CJ
OS12 respectively.
7. Verify the temperature accuracy of each of the 12 input channels using
the calibrated thermocouple and temperature source. The accuracy
should be within 75% of the internal CJC accuracy given in the
specifications.
8. Record the date with the CAL DATE parameter.

161
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Description

14 3560 Extended Communication Module

This section explains the features and operation of the optional 3560 Extended
Communication Module.

14.1 Description
The 3560 is an add-on module that extends the communication capabilities of
the 1560. First, it provides a GPIB (IEEE-488) interface. With this interface a
system controller can remotely operate the 1560 and read measurements
through an IEEE-488 bus. The Centronics printer interface allows the 1560 to
connect to a printer. The 1560 can then be programmed to print out measure-
ment data in real time. Measurements previously acquired and stored within the
1560 can also be printed. The 3560 also provides an analog output. This output
sources a voltage that represents the value of measurements. The analog output
can be connected to a strip-chart recorder for a graphical plot of temperature
over time. Finally, the 3560 also adds a second RS-232 serial port. This can be
used as a bi-directional communication interface or as a serial printer interface
for the printing out of data.

14.2 Specifications
See Table 30 on page 164.

14.3 Installation
The 3560 Extended Communication Module attaches to the back of the 1560
system as any other module. For instructions on installing modules onto the
1560 see Section 4.1. Since the 3560 Module has connectors placed on the
back it must be installed as the last module in the stack.
Once the 3560 is installed onto the 1560 the 1560 will automatically recognize
the Communication Module and the functions it provides. Five devices are
added: the GPIB Communication Device (GPIB), Serial Communication De-
vice (SERC), Serial Printer Device (SERP), Parallel Printer Device (PARP),
and Analog Output Device (AOUT). These devices will appear labeled as indi-
cated with the appropriate soft-key functions. The operation of each device is
explained in the following sections.

14.4 GPIB Communication Device

The GPIB (IEEE-488) interface allows the 1560 to be connected to an
IEEE-488 bus along with other instruments. A system controller can remotely
control the operation of the 1560 and read measurements.

163
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

Table 30 3560 Specifications

GPIB (IEEE-488) interface

Capability IEEE-488.2, 1992
SH1, complete source handshake capability
AH1, complete acceptor handshake capability
T6, basic talker, serial poll, no talk-only capability, unaddress if MLA
TE0, no extended-talk capability
L4, basic listener, no listen-only capability, unaddress if MTA
LE0, no extended-listen capability
SR1, complete serial poll capability
RL0, no remote-local capability
PP0, no parallel poll capability
DC1, complete device clear capability
DT0, no device trigger capability
C0, no control capability
E2, three-state drivers
Parallel (Centronics) printer interface
Connector 25-pin subminiature D
Serial (RS-232) interface
Connector 9-pin subminiature D
baud rate 1200 to 19200
Protocol 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
Analog output
Number of channels 1
Connector two-terminal screw clamp
Voltage range –1.25 to +1.25V
Voltage resolution 0.0006V
Digital resolution 12 bits
Maximum source resistance 1Ω
Maximum output current 2 mA
Linearity ±0.0006V
Typical accuracy† ±2% ±0.02V
Isolation grounded
Recommended operating temperature range 18 to 28°C (64 to 82°F)
Absolute operating temperature range 5 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Weight 2.2 lbs. (1 kg.)
† Accuracy of the analog output can be significantly improved by calibration

164
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
GPIB Communication Device

14.4.1 Capability
The 3560 GPIB interface conforms to standard IEEE-488.2, 1992. Its capabili-
ties are identified as SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, DC1, and E2. The interface has
the capabilities of talk, listen, serial poll, and device clear. It has no capability
for talk-only, listen-only, extended talk or listen, parallel poll, remote-local con-
trol, or trigger, nor can it act as controller. The IEEE-488 commands GET,
GTL, LLO, and REN are accepted without error but ignored.

14.4.2 Connection
The IEEE-488 port is located on the back of the 3560 Module. Use a standard
IEEE-488 cable to connect to your GPIB controller. A shielded cable should be
used to prevent EM emissions.

14.4.3 Device Setup

The 1560 system must be set up to respond to the address the controller will
use to communicate with it. The address is set using the SET UP DEVICE
function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the GPIB
device. A window appears showing the setup parameters for the device:

SET UP DEVICE: GPIB

ADDRESS: 22
TERMINATION: LF
RESET: NO

For the 3560 GPIB Communication Device the list of parameters includes ad-
dress, line termination, and interface reset function. The default address is 22.
The valid range is 1 to 30. The address will remain unchanged if an attempt is
made to set the address outside this range. Use the numeric buttons to change
the address, if necessary, and press ENTER. The new address will take effect
immediately.
The TERMINATION parameter is used to set the line termination character for
IEEE-488 communications. This should normally be set to LF which causes a
linefeed character (ASCII 0A hex or 10 decimal) to be sent at the end of each
line of transmission. If necessary, this can be changed to a carriage return char-
acter (ASCII 0D hex or 13 decimal). The termination is changed using the
LR buttons and pressing ENTER.

165
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

The RESET function can be used to reset the IEEE-488 interface and clear the
input and output buffers. This is equivalent to executing the DCL or SDC
IEEE-488 device clear commands. Use the LR buttons to change the option
to YES then press ENTER.

14.4.4 Commands
The commands used for remote communications are explained in detail in Sec-
tion 6. Commands are available to control nearly every function of the 1560.
For example, the “ROUT:CLOS (@1)” command can be used to select input
channel 1 for measurement. The “INIT:CONT ON” command can be used to
initiate continuous measuring. The “FETC? (@1)” command can be used to
read measurements from input channel 1.

14.4.5 Serial Poll

Serial poll can be used to alert the IEEE-488 controller whenever certain events
occur such as completed measurement or communication error. Serial poll is
enabled by setting the desired mask bits of the Service Request Enable Register
(see Section 6.5.10.7). For instance, if the SRE register is set using the “*SRE
128” command the 1560 will issue a service request whenever the Operation
Status Bit (OSB) in the Status Byte Register is set (see Section 6.5.10.9). For
summary bits in the Status Byte Register, such as the OSB, reporting must be
enabled by setting certain mask bits in the appropriate status register. For in-
stance, for the OSB to report a completed measurement, bit 4 of the Operation
Status Enable Register must be set (see Sections 6.5.10.13 and 6.5.10.15).
When a service request is generated by the 1560 it sends the SRQ message to
the IEEE-488 controller. The controller then reads the Status Byte Register
from the 1560. (The meaning of each bit in the Status Byte Register is ex-
plained in Section 6.5.10.9.) Bit 6 of the status byte will be set if the 1560
caused the service request. Once the status byte is read the 1560 removes the
SRQ message.
The IEEE-488 controller can use serial poll at any time to read the status byte
from the 1560. Bit 6 of the status byte will be set if the 1560 is requesting ser-
vice or 0 otherwise.
The Status Byte Register can also be polled using the “*STB?” command (see
Section 6.5.10.9).

14.4.6 Device Clear

The 3560 GPIB interface accepts both the DCL and SDC IEEE-488 commands
to clear the device. These clear the input and output buffers.

14.4.7 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 3560 GPIB Communication Device. The device number of the

166
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Serial Communication Device

GPIB Communication Device is 1. The module number for the 3560 module is
its position in the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the
3560 being the last, the module number for the 3560 is 4. Table 31 shows the
device commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the GPIB Com-
munication Device.

Table 31 GPIB Communicatinos Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

ADDR 1-30 IEEE-488 address
TERM LF or CR line termination
RSET YES reset interface

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 3560 Communication
Module is placed fourth in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD4:DEV1:WRIT “ADDR”,17 Set the IEEE-488 address to 17.
SYST:MOD4:DEV1:READ? “ADDR” Read the IEEE-488 address.
SYST:MOD4:DEV1:WRIT “TERM”,LF Set the termination to linefeed.
SYST:MOD4:DEV1:WRIT “RSET”,YES Reset the IEEE-488 interface.

14.5 Serial Communication Device

The 3560 Extended Communication Module adds an additional RS-232 serial
communications interface to the 1560 system. Connecting to the rear panel
RS-232 port may be more convenient than connecting to the RS-232 port un-
derneath the base.

14.5.1 Connection
The RS-232 port is located on the back of the 3560 Module. Wiring of the in-
terface cable should be as shown in Figure 11 in Section 6.2. A shielded cable
should be used to prevent EM emissions. The protocol for RS-232 communica-
tions is 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

14.5.2 Device Setup

The 3560 Serial Communication Device must be set up to use the same baud
rate as the equipment with which it will be communicating. The baud rate is set
using the SET UP DEVICE function in the MODULE soft-key menu (see
Section 5.4.2). Select the SERC device. A window appears showing the setup
parameters for the device:

167
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SET UP DEVICE: SERC

BAUD RATE: 2400 LR

DUPLEX: HALF
LINEFEED: OFF

For the 3560 Serial Communication Device the list of parameters includes baud
rate, duplex, and linefeed. Use the LR buttons to change the baud rate, if
necessary, and press ENTER. Setting the baud rate here also sets the baud rate
of the Serial Printer Device.
The DUPLEX parameter is used to set the duplex or echo mode of the RS-232
communications. Full duplex enables echo so that all characters received are
echoed back to the computer. This is useful when using terminal emulation
software. Half duplex disables echo. This is the usual mode when using control
software on the computer. The duplex mode is changed using the LR but-
tons and pressing ENTER.
The LINEFEED parameter determines whether or not a linefeed character
(ASCII 0A hex or 10 decimal) is sent at the end of each line of transmission in
addition to a carriage return character (ASCII 0D hex or 13 decimal). Use the
LR buttons to change the parameter then press ENTER.

14.5.3 Commands
The commands used for remote communications are explained in detail in Sec-
tion 5. Commands are available to control nearly every function of the 1560.
For example, the “ROUT:CLOS (@1)” command can be used to select input
channel 1 for measurement. The “INIT:CONT ON” command can be used to
initiate continuous measuring. The “FETC? (@1)” command can be used to
read measurements from input channel 1.

14.5.4 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 3560 Serial Communication Device. The device number of the Se-
rial Communication Device is 2. The module number for the 3560 module is its
position in the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the
3560 being the last, the module number for the 3560 is 4. Table 32 shows the

168
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Serial Printer Device

device commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the Serial Com-
munication Device.

Table 32 Serial Communication Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

BAUD 1200, 2400, 9600, 14400, or baud rate
19200
DUPL HALF or FULL duplex mode
LFEE OFF or ON linefeed

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device setup
parameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 3560 Communication
Module is placed fourth in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD4:DEV2:WRIT “BAUD”,9600 Set the baud rate to 9600.
SYST:MOD4:DEV2:WRIT “DUPL”,HALF Set the duplex mode to half
duplex (echo off).
SYST:MOD4:DEV2:READ? “DUPL” Read the duplex mode.
SYST:MOD4:DEV2:WRIT “LFEE”,OFF Disable linefeed.

14.6 Serial Printer Device

The RS-232 port of the 3560 can be used as either a communications interface
or a printer interface. This section explains the operation of the 3560 Serial
Printer Device. The Serial Printer Device can be used to print data to a printer
or terminal equipped with an RS-232 serial interface. For connection of the
RS-232 interface refer to Section 14.5.1 above.

14.6.1 Device Setup

The setup parameters for the 3560 Serial Printer Device include baud rate and
linefeed. The baud rate must be set the same as the baud rate of the printer or
terminal. The parameters are set using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the SERP device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the device:

169
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

SET UP DEVICE: SERP

BAUD RATE: 2400 LR

LINEFEED: OFF

Use the LR buttons to change the baud rate, if necessary, and press
ENTER. Setting the baud rate here also sets the baud rate of the Serial Com-
munication Device.
The LINEFEED parameter determines whether or not a linefeed character
(ASCII 0A hex or 10 decimal) is sent at the end of each line of transmission in
addition to a carriage return character (ASCII 0D hex or 13 decimal). Use the
LR buttons to change the parameter then press ENTER.

14.6.2 Printing Measurement Data

The 1560 can be programmed to print out measurement data in real time. The
printing of measurements is enabled using the PRINT OUTPUT function in
the OUTPUT soft-key menu (see Section 5.3.3). A window will show a list of
printer devices. Move to the SERP device using the UD buttons. Change the
option to ON using the LR buttons. The 1560 will immediately begin print-
ing all new measurements to the printer or terminal connected to the RS-232
port of the Communication Module.
The 1560 can also print out previously-acquired measurement data. This is
done using the PRINT MEMORY function in the OUTPUT soft-key menu
(see Section 5.3.4). A window will show a list of printer devices. Select the Se-
rial Printer Device by moving to the SERP device using the UD buttons and
pressing ENTER. Now, enter the number of measurements to print using the
numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. Press ENTER again to confirm. The
number of measurements you specified, if available, will be retrieved from
memory and printed to the printer or terminal connected to the RS-232 port of
the Communication Module.

14.6.3 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 3560 Serial Printer Device as explained in Section 14.5.4 above.

170
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Parallel Printer Device

The device number of the Serial Printer Device is 3. Table 33 shows the device
commands used to read or set the setup parameters of the Serial Printer Device.

Table 33 Serial Printer Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

BAUD 1200, 2400, 9600, 14400, or 19200 baud rate
LFEE OFF or ON linefeed

14.7 Parallel Printer Device

The Centronics parallel port of the 3560 can be used to connect the 1560 to a
standard printer. The printer can be used to print out measurement data.

14.7.1 Connection
The parallel printer port is located on the back of the 3560 Module. Use a stan-
dard Centronics parallel printer cable to connect to your printer. A shielded ca-
ble should be used to prevent EM emissions.

14.7.2 Device Setup

The setup parameters for the 3560 Parallel Printer Device include linefeed and
form feed. The parameters are set using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the PARP device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the Serial Printer Device:

SET UP DEVICE: PARP

LINEFEED: ON LR

FORM FEED: NO

The LINEFEED parameter determines whether or not a linefeed character

(ASCII 0A hex or 10 decimal) is sent at the end of each line of transmission in
addition to a carriage return character (ASCII 0D hex or 13 decimal). Use the
LR buttons to change the parameter then press ENTER.

171
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

The FORM FEED parameter can be used to eject a partially-printed page of pa-
per. Use the LR buttons to change the parameter to YES then press
ENTER.

14.7.3 Printing Measurement Data

The 1560 can be programmed to print out measurement data in real time. The
printing of measurements is enabled using the PRINT OUTPUT function in
the OUTPUT soft-key menu (see Section 5.3.3). A window will show a list of
printer devices. Move to the PARP device using the UD buttons. Change the
option to ON using the LR buttons. The 1560 will immediately begin print-
ing all new measurements to the printer or terminal connected to the parallel
printer port of the Communication Module.
The 1560 can also print previously-acquired measurement data. This is done
using the PRINT MEMORY function in the OUTPUT soft-key menu (see
Section 5.3.4). A window will show a list of printer devices. Select the Parallel
Printer Device by moving to the PARP device using the UD buttons and
pressing ENTER. Now, enter the number of measurements to print using the
numeric buttons and pressing ENTER. Press ENTER again to confirm. The
number of measurements you specified, if available, will be retrieved from
memory and printed to the printer or terminal connected to the parallel printer
port of the Communication Module.

14.7.4 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 3560 Parallel Printer Device. The device number of the Parallel
Printer Device is 4. The module number for the 3560 module is its position in
the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the 3560 being
the last, the module number for the 3560 is 4. Table 34 shows the device com-
mands used to read or set the setup parameters of the Parallel Printer Device.

Table 34 Parallel Printer Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

LFEE OFF or ON linefeed
FFEE YES form feed

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device pa-
rameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 3560 Communication Mod-
ule is placed fourth in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD4:DEV4:WRIT “LFEE”,OFF Disable linefeed.

172
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Analog Output Device

SYST:MOD4:DEV4:READ? “LFEE” Read the linefeed setting.

SYST:MOD4:DEV4:WRIT “FFEE”,YES Send a form feed instruction.

14.8 Analog Output Device

The analog output port of the 3560 can be used to connect the 1560 to a
strip-chart recorder, temperature controller, or other device that receives a volt-
age-encoded temperature signal. The analog output transmits a voltage that is a
function of the measured temperature. The voltage can represent the measure-
ment on any input channel or the difference between the measurements of any
two input channels. It can represent resistance, temperature, or a statistical
function of temperature. The analog output has a range of ±1.25V. The digi-
tal-to-analog conversion has a resolution of 12 bits or 0.0006V. It can be cali-
brated for an accuracy of better than 2 mV.

14.8.1 Connection
The analog output port is located on the back of the 3560 Communication
Module. The terminals are labeled ‘+’ and ‘ –’. The ‘–’ terminal connects to
ground. The ‘+’ terminal carries an analog signal relative to ground. Insert
wires with 1/2” of insulation removed into the terminals and clamp the termi-
nals down using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

14.8.2 Device Setup

The setup parameters for the 3560 Analog Output Device include center and
scale. The parameters are set using the SET UP DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.2). Select the AOUT device. A win-
dow appears showing the setup parameters for the device:

SET UP DEVICE: AOUT

CENTER: 0.0
SCALE: 100.0

The CENTER parameter determines the measurement value that produces 0V.
For instance, if CENTER is 25.0 then a reading of 25.0°C will cause the output
voltage to be 0. Use the numeric buttons to set the CENTER parameter then
press ENTER.

173
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

The SCALE parameter determines the measurement range that produces a 1V

change in the output. For instance, if CENTER is 25.0 and SCALE is 100.0
then a reading of 0°C causes a voltage of –0.25V to be output. Use the numeric
buttons to set the SCALE parameter then press ENTER.

14.8.3 Selecting Data

The 1560 can be programmed to send any type of measurement from any chan-
nel to the analog output. This is done using the OUTPUT CHAN function in
the OUTPUT soft-key menu (see Section 5.3.2). A window will show a list of
output channels. Select the AOUT channel using the UD buttons and press-
ing ENTER. Select the input channel you want to output using the +CHAN-
NEL parameter. A window appears showing a list of input channels. Move to
the desired channel and press ENTER. If you want to output the difference be-
tween two channels select a channel for the –CHANNEL in the same way, oth-
erwise leave it 0. Next, select the calculation type. You can select between
TEMP (temperature), INPUT (i.e. resistance), or various statistical functions of
temperature. The analog output will immediately begin transmitting a DC volt-
age representing the specified measurement. The voltage will be offset and
scaled based on the CENTER and SCALE setup parameters explained above.
The output will be updated every time a new measurement is completed on ei-
ther of the selected input channels.

14.8.4 Calibration
The 3560 Analog Output Device can be calibrated to improve accuracy. The
calibration parameters are accessed using the CAL DEVICE function in the
MODULE soft-key menu (see Section 5.4.3). Select the AOUT device. A win-
dow appears showing the calibration parameters for the Analog Output Device:

CALIBRATE DEVICE: AOUT

0V ADJ: 0.0
1V ADJ: 0.0
CAL DATE: 09-21-95

The 0V_ADJ parameter adjusts the accuracy at 0V. As an example, if the out-
put is +0.013V when it should be exactly 0 then 0V_ADJ should be adjusted by
subtracting 0.013 from its present value. The error at 0V can be determined by
measuring a know value, such as the resistance of a short, and then setting the
CENTER setup parameter to that value. Set the SCALE parameter to a large
value, such as 10000, for better accuracy. The output should then be exactly 0V.

174
 14 3560 Extended Communication Module
Analog Output Device

The 1V_ADJ parameter adjusts the accuracy at 1V. As an example, if the out-
put is +0.991V when it should be exactly 1V then 1V_ADJ should be adjusted
by adding 0.009 to its present value. The error at 1V can be determined by
measuring the resistance of a short and setting the SCALE setup parameter to a
large value, such as 10000, and the CENTER parameter to the opposite of that
value (–10000). The output should be exactly 1V.
The CAL DATE parameter can be used to record the date the calibration was
performed.

14.8.5 Device Setup Commands

The SYST:MODn:DEVn:READ? and SYST: MODn:DEVn:WRIT commands
(see Sections 6.5.8.19 and 6.5.8.20) can be used to read or set the setup param-
eters for the 3560 Analog Output Device. The device number of the Analog
Output Device is 5. The module number for the 3560 module is its position in
the stack. For example, if the 1560 has four add-on modules, the 3560 being
the last, the module number for the 3560 is 4. Table 35 shows the device com-
mands used to read or set the setup parameters of the Analog Output Device.

Table 35 Analog Output Device Commands

Device Command Parameter Description

CNTR numeric 0V center
SCAL numeric 1V scale

Below are some examples of using the device commands to set the device pa-
rameters. For these examples it is assumed that the 3560 Communication Mod-
ule is placed fourth in the stack. These commands can be sent through any
communication interface including the IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces.
SYST:MOD4:DEV5:WRIT “CNTR”,25 Set center of range at 25°C.
SYST:MOD4:DEV5:READ? “CNTR” Read center setting.
SYST:MOD4:DEV5:WRIT “SCAL”,10 Set scale to 10°C/V.

175
 15 Maintenance

15 Maintenance
• The calibration instrument has been designed with the utmost care. Ease
of operation and simplicity of maintenance have been a central theme in
the product development. Therefore, with proper care the instrument
should require very little maintenance. Avoid operating the instrument in
an oily, wet, dirty, or dusty environments.
• If the outside of the instrument becomes soiled, it may be wiped clean
with a damp cloth and mild detergent. Do not use harsh chemicals on the
surface which may damage the paint or the plastic of the outside shell.
• If a hazardous material is spilt on or inside the equipment, the user is re-
sponsible for taking the appropriate decontamination steps as outlined by
the national safety council with respect to the material.
• If the mains supply cord becomes damaged, replace it with a cord with
the appropriate gauge wire for the current of the instrument. If there are
any questions, call Hart Scientific Customer Service for more informa-
tion.
• Before using any cleaning or decontamination method except those rec-
ommended by Hart, users should check with Hart Scientific Customer
Service to be sure that the proposed method will not damage the equip-
ment.
• If the instrument is used in a manner not in accordance with the equip-
ment design, the operation of the thermometer may be impaired or safety
hazards may arise.

177
 16 Troubleshooting
Incorrect Temperature Reading

16 Troubleshooting
In case you run into difficulty while operating the 1560 system, this section
provides some suggestions that may help you solve the problem. Below are
several situations that may arise followed by possible causes of the problem
and suggested actions you might take.

16.1 Incorrect Temperature Reading

While attempting to measure temperature the display shows an incorrect value
or no value at all (“. . . . . . . . . . “).
If the temperature readings seem to be incorrect you should first check to see if
the resistance, or voltage in the case of thermocouples, is being measured cor-
rectly. Set up the display to show the resistance or voltage (INPUT) for the
channel (see Section 5.3.1.2). If the resistance or voltage is incorrect refer to
the next subsection for troubleshooting incorrect resistance or voltage readings.
If the resistance or voltage is being measured correctly but the displayed tem-
perature value is incorrect consider the following possibilities:
• One or more coefficients are incorrect. This is a common mistake.
While entering coefficients it is easy to miss a digit or sign. Check all the
values carefully using the EDIT PROBE function (see Section 5.2.1)
comparing them with the values on the calibration certificate for the
probe. Use the TEST CONV function to test the coefficients (see Section
5.2.3).
• The selected conversion type is incorrect. Check to make sure the cor-
rect conversion type is selected. In the case of thermocouples, make sure
you have selected the correct thermocouple type. Again, you can use the
TEST CONV function to test the temperature conversion calculation.
• The measurement is out of range. The 1560 may not be able to calcu-
late temperature accurately if the resistance or voltage is outside the valid
range. The measured resistance or voltage may be too low or too high if
the actual temperature is too low or too high or if there is a problem with
the sensor (see below).

16.2 Incorrect Resistance or Voltage Reading

While attempting to measure resistance or voltage the display shows an incor-
rect value or no value at all (“. . . . . . . . . . “).
Consider the following possibilities:
• Poor or incorrect connection of the probe. A common mistake is to
connect the wires of the probe to the wrong terminals. Check the wiring
carefully, especially when using a four-wire PRT (see Figure 13 on page
114 or Figure 15 on page 126). Make sure the lead wires are fastened
down tightly.

179
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

• Open, shorted, or damaged sensor or lead wires. In the case of resis-

tance sensors check the resistance across the sensor using a hand-held
DMM. Also check the resistance between common pairs of leads. Check
to make sure there is no conductivity between any of the leads and the
probe sheath. Use a good-quality sensor to avoid errors caused by drift,
hysteresis, or insulation leakage. In the case of thermocouples, use a
hand-held DMM to check its voltage.
• Improper setting for three or four-wire probe. When using the 2562 or
2564 scanner modules you need to make sure the correct wiring type is
selected (read carefully Section 9.3.1 or 11.3.1). Selecting three-wire in-
put while using four-wire probes may cause errors of 0.01 to 0.1Ω. Se-
lecting four-wire input while using three-wire probes will result in erratic
or out-of-range readings.
• Electrical interference. Intense radio-frequency radiation near the 1560
or probes can induce noise into the measurement circuits resulting in er-
ratic readings. The 1560 is intended to operate in a laboratory environ-
ment with limited radio-frequency noise. If interference seems to be a
problem you might try eliminating the source of interference or moving
the 1560 to a different location. A well-grounded, shielded cable should
be used for the probe leads.
• Stem conduction error. The problem may be that the actual temperature
of the sensor is not what you expect. This is often the result of stem con-
duction where heat flowing through the stem of the probe to ambient af-
fects the temperature of the probe. It is very important that immersion
probes be inserted to an adequately depth into the material being mea-
sured. Measuring temperature using a surface sensor can be especially
difficult as the sensor is directly exposed to ambient.

16.3 Communication Difficulties

You are having trouble establishing communications between the 1560 and a
remote computer using either the base RS-232 port, the 3560 Module RS-232
port, or the 3560 Module IEEE-488 port.
First, test RS-232 communications using the base serial port. Connect a serial
cable to a computer running terminal software such as Windows® 3.1 Terminal
or Windows® 95 Hyperterminal. Be sure to set the baud rates of both the 1560
and the computer to the same number. Use 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
Test transmission from the 1560 by enabling the PRINT OUTPUT function
for the SER0 device. You should see measurement data appear on the com-
puter. Test reception by sending a command to the 1560 such as “UNIT:TEMP
F” or “UNIT:TEMP C”. You should see the units of the measurement change
accordingly. Be sure to use a space character to separate the header from the
parameter in this and other commands.
Repeat the same tests with the RS-232 port on the 3560 module. Test the trans-
mission of measurement data and the reception of commands.

180
 16 Troubleshooting
Blank Screen

Debugging IEEE-488 communications can be more difficult since it is so much

more complex. The 3560 Module has a diagnostic mode that can help in trou-
bleshooting communication problems. Issuing the command “*DIA” to the
3560 Module RS-232 port enables the diagnostic mode. Diagnostic information
will be printed from the 3560 Module RS-232 port and can be viewed on your
computer. You will be able to see how commands are received at the IEEE-488
port and monitor the value of the IEEE-488 status byte register (see Section
6.5.10.9). If the IEEE-488 port does not seem to be receiving any data check
that the GPIB addresses are correct (see Section 14.4.3). Also check the cable.
If commands are being received but your computer is not receiving any data
from the 1560 in response to the command check that the termination character
is set correctly (also Section 14.4.3). Setup your software so that it does not re-
quire the EOI message.

16.4 Blank Screen

The screen lights up when the 1560 is switched on but the screen appears
blank.
This problem can be caused by improper adjustment of the contrast. After the
power is switched on allow the 1560 at least one minute to complete its self test
and power on sequence. Then, try to adjust the contrast using the contrast
buttons.

16.5 Error Message at Power Up

The 1560 reports an error during the power up self-test.
On power up the 1560 performs a series of self-tests to check the operation of
all its components and each of the modules. The results of the self-tests are re-
ported on the screen. Normally, all tests will report “OK.” A failure of one or
more component will cause error messages to be reported. A bus error, a mod-
ule error, a failure to recognized a module, or a “BATTERY BACKED RAM”
error is often caused by a module being improperly attached in which case the
base will not be able to properly communicate with that module and those be-
hind it. Try reattaching the module while ensuring that the bus connectors are
all fully inserted. If this does not solve the problem it may be caused by a dam-
aged module or the failure of a component within the module such as the fuse.
This and other types of component failures generally require a qualified factory
technician to replace the faulty component. Contact a Hart Scientific Autho-
rized Service Center for assistance (see Section 1.3).

16.6 CE Comments
16.6.1 EMC Directive
Hart Scientific's equipment has been tested to meet the European Electromag-
netic Compatibility Directive (EMC Directive, 2004/108/EC). The Declaration

181
1560 Thermometer Readout
User’s Guide

of Conformity for your instrument lists the specific standards to which the unit
was tested.
The instrument was designed specifically as a test and measuring device. Com-
pliance to the EMC directive is through EN 61326-1:2006 Electrical equipment
for measurement, control and laboratory use - EMC requirements
As noted in the EN 61326-1, the instrument can have varying configurations.
The instrument was tested in a typical configuration with shielded RS-232
cables.

16.6.1.1 Immunity Testing

The instrument was tested to the requirements for industrial locations. This al-
lows the instrument to be used in all types of locations from the laboratory to
the factory floor. Criterion A, B, or C was used for Radiated RF (IEC
61000-4-3) depending on the module configuration. Criterion A or B was used
for Conducted RF (IEC 61000-4-6) depending on the module configuration.
Therefore, the operation of the instrument may be affected by excessive elec-
tromagnetic interference and the instrument may not perform within the normal
specification limits in such an environment.
Criterion A or C was used for Electrostatic Discharge (ESD, IEC 61000-4-2)
depending on the module configuration. Criterion A or B was used for Electric
Fast Transit (EFT, Burst, IEC 61000-4-4) depending on the module configura-
tion. If the instrument is subjected to ESD conditions at industrial levels, the in-
strument may require the user to cycle the power to return to normal operation.

16.6.1.2 Emission Testing

The instrument fulfills the limit requirements for Class A equipment but does
not fulfill the limit requirements for Class B equipment. The instrument was
not designed to be used in domestic establishments.

16.6.2 Low Voltage Directive (Safety)

In order to comply with the European Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC),
Hart Scientific equipment has been designed to meet the IEC 1010-1 (EN
61010-1) and the IEC 1010-2-010 (EN 61010-2-010) standards.

182
 Index

Index
! D
LCR 12 DELAY 10,31,48
LR 12 DISP WINDOW menu 46
UD 12 Del button 11
2-wire probe 127,140
2560 SPRT Module 113 E
2561 HTPRT Module 119
EDIT PROBE soft-key 33
2562 PRT Scanner Module 125
ENTER button 11
2563 Thermistor Module 133
EXIT button 11
2564 Thermistor Scanner Module 139
2565 Precision Thermocouple Module 147
2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module 155 G
3-wire probe 127,140 GPIB
3560 Extended Communications Module 163
See IEEE-488
4-wire probe 127,140
GRAPH WINDOW soft-key 48

A
I
AVER soft-key 32
IEC-751 38
IEEE-488 13,63,163
C INPUT menu 29
CAL DEVICE soft-key 55 IPTS-68 conversion 6,37
CJC 7,14,41,43,147,149,155,157 ITS-90 conversion 6
CLEAR GRAPH soft-key 49
CLEAR STATS soft-key 53 L
CONVERSION 34
LR
COPY PROBE soft-key 43
COUNT N 29 left right arrows 12
Calibration Parameters
2563 Thermistor Module 136 M
Callendar-Van Dusen conversion 6,38 MEAS soft-key 29
MEASURE mode 29
MODULE INFO soft-key 56

183
Index

MODULE menu 53 SYSTEM menu 57

Serial
N See RS-232

NVRAM Steinhart-Hart equation 7,39 - 40

See non-volatile RAM

T
O TEST CONV soft-key 45
TIME soft-key 58
OUTPUT CHAN soft-key 50
OUTPUT menu 45,47,49,51
U
P UNITS soft-key 57
USER channel 43
PASSWORD soft-key 58
UD
PRIM CHAN 31
PRINT MEMORY soft-key 52 up down arrows 12
PRINT OUTPUT soft-key 51
PROBE menu 33 W
PRT 6,113,125
W(T90) conversion 37

R A
R(W) 36
accuracy
RS-232 12 - 13,63,167,169
See specifications
RTD 6,113,125
analog output device 173
average, input 14,32
S
SCAN CHAN soft-key 31
B
SCAN MODE soft-key 32
SCROLL WINDOW soft-key 49 base 5
SET FIELDS soft-key 46 base microprocessor 7
SET UP DEVICE soft-key 54 basic operation 21
SET UP SCREEN soft-key 53 brightness, screen 53
SPRT 6,113,125 buttons 11
STAT WINDOW soft-key 46 LCR 12
SYSTEM INFO soft-key 59 LR 12

184
 Index

UD 12 D
data field 17,46
C data processing 14 - 15,17
calibration 59 delay 14
2560 SPRT Module 116 device 6,54
2561 SPRT Module 122 device calibration 55
display 7,46
2562 PRT Scanner Module 129
2563 Thermistor Module 136
F
2564 Thermistor Scanner Module 143
features 5
2565 Precision Thermocouple Module 152 -
153
2566 Thermocouple Scanner Module 158 G
3560 Analog Output 174 general description 5
calibration parameters 6 graph 48
graph mode display 10,48
2560 SPRT Module 116
2561 HTPRT Module 122
I
2562 PRT Scanner Module 129
2564 Thermistor Scanner Module 143 input channel 23 - 24,31,33,47
input device 13
2565 Precisioin Thermocouple Module 152
inputs 14
channel numbers 24 installing new modules 21
characterization coefficients 25,33,45
cold-junction compensation
M
See CJC
maintenance 177
communication device 13,63,163
measurement status 9
communication ports 7,12 - 13,63,165,167
memory 16,52,170,172
communications 63,163
module 5,13
connecting a probe 114,120,127,134,140
module bus 12,14
contrast, screen 12,23
conversion, temperature
See temperature conversion
N
current 115,121,128,135,142 non-volatile RAM 7,13
numeric keys 11

185
Index

O 1560 19
2560 Module 113
ohms conversion
2561 Module 119
See R(W)
2562 Module 125
output channel 16,50,174
output device 13,17,173 2563 Module 133
2564 Module 139

P 2565 Module 147

2566 Module 155
password 33,55,58
platinum resistance thermometer 3560 Module 164

See PRT standard platinum resistance thermometer

polynomial conversion 39 See SPRT

power supply 12,23 statistical display 10,46
printer output device 13,16,51,169,171 statistics 16,47,50
probe characterization 21,25,33
T
R temperature conversion 14,25,34,45
resistance temperature detector thermistor 6,39 - 40,134,139
See RTD thermocouple 7,14,147,156
thermocouple conversions 41,149,156
thermocouple polynomial 43
S
thermocouple table 42
sampling control 14 time 9,14,58
scan 31 troubleshooting 179,181
scan mode 26,32
screen brightness
U
See brightness, screen
unit conversion 16
screen saver 54
unit, temperature 57
scrolling display 49
scrolling window 10
self-test 23 V
serial number, probe 34 volts conversion 40,149,156
soft-key 10 - 11,29
soft-key menu 29
specifications

186